Document Scope This manual describes the software installation for the applications (excluding communication applications) on TSX 37 using PL7 software.

Validity Note The updating of this publication takes into account the functionalities of PL7 V4.5.

However it enables the installation of previous versions of PL7.

Related

Documents

Title of Documentation

Hardware installation manual

Reference Number

TSX DM 37 50 E

User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at [email protected]

About the book

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Shared application-specific functions

Presentation

Aim of this part

What's in this part?

This part gives a general overview of the acknowledgment of specific applications by the PL7 software.

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter

Chaptername

Common application specific functions: General

Objects associated with specific applications

Application-specific instructions

Appendices

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Shared application-specific functions

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Common application specific functions: General

Presentation

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter presents the common application specific functions of the PL7 software.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

General Presentation

Configuration of an application-specific function.

Adjustment of an application-specific function

Debugging an application-specific function

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General

General Presentation

Introduction The PL7 software allows for the installation of application-specific functions in software form (DISCRETE, analog, process control, etc.).

The application-specific functions are automated functions which interface with the control part (the PLC program) and the operational part (sensors, actuators and man/machine interfaces).

l l

An application-specific function on Micro is presented, depending on the application, in the form of: a module (e.g.: counting application), a built-in interface (e.g.: communication port).

Integrated interface

C o u n n g i t

A n a

TSX

3722

DMZ

28DR

7 9

8 10

Application-specific module

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Software installation principle

Software installation resources

General

The table below gives a short description of the general principle for the installation of an application-specific function. This principle will be covered again later in this manual in more specific detail for each application.

Mode

Local

Local or online

Online

Phase Description

Configuration Configuration of the module or built-in interface

Symbolization Symbolization of variables associated with the application-specific function.

Programming Programming of the function to be carried out using: l l bit and word objects associated with the module, application-specific instructions.

Transfer Transferring the application to the PLC.

Documentation Printing of the different information about the application.

Debug Debugging the application (I/O control, fault identification).

Note: The order shown above is given as an indication only; the PL7 software allows the editors to be used interactively in the order required (however, the data or program editor cannot be used if the I/O modules have not been configured first).

An application-specific function is installed using: l standard PL7 tools: l pull-down menus, l l status bars, tool bars, l editors, l ...

application-specific screens, l l configuration screens, adjustment screens, l l debug screens, language objects giving program-based access to inputs and outputs of the module or built-in interface.

l instructions relative to the application-specific function, where applicable.

Note: The different screens as well as the objects associated with an applicationspecific module are accessible via the software as soon as the module is declared in the configuration, without it even being necessary to write a program line.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General

Configuration of an application-specific function.

Introduction The Configuration function makes it possible to define the operating characteristics of the module or the application-specific interface.

l l

This function is carried out from the PL7 configuration editor: in local mode, in online mode when the application is stored in non-write protected RAM (limited to certain parameters).

Note: The configuration parameters are not modifiable by program.

Illustration The screen below is an example of a configuration screen of an application-specific module (application-specific module TSY CTZ 2A).

TSX CTZ 2A [POSITION 04 ]

Configuration

Designation : 2 CHAN. MULTIF COUNT 40kHz

Counter 0

Function: des cames

Up/Down counting

Input interfaces

IA Up/Down counts, application

Solid state counter

Line check Multiply by 1

Preset on IPres

Rising edge IPres

Read on IRead

Rising edgeIRead by 4

Task : des cames

MAST

Event

EVT l l

Here, the operating characteristics are: l the selection of a function associated with a channel: up counting, down counting or up/down counting, selection of the task which updates the inputs/outputs of the module,

...

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Confirmation

General

The characteristics defined in the configuration screen must be subject to a global confirmation of the application. This may be done: l l in local mode, so that the modifications are taken into account, in online mode in order to: l l update the configuration parameters in the PLC, reconfigure the channel of the module with its new parameters (the adjustment parameters return to their initial value).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General

Adjustment of an application-specific function

Introduction The Adjustment function allows the operating parameters of the applicationspecific module or interface to be displayed and modified, when they are modifiable.

This function is carried out from the PL7 adjustment editor: l in local mode, in order to define the initial parameters (value of the parameters during setup or on a cold restart), l in online mode, in order to define the current parameters (values lost upon cold restart if they have not been saved in advance).

Note: The adjustment parameters are modifiable by program.

Illustration

Confirmation

The screen below is an example of an adjustment screen of an application-specific module (application-specific module TSY CTZ 2A).

TSX CTZ 2A [POSITION 03 ]

Adjust

Designation : 2 CHAN MULTIF COUNT 40kHz

Symbol :

Counter :

Counter 0

Function:

Up/Down counting

Preset value

Initial value

1 000

1000

Threshold value

Threshold

Initial value

2 000

2000

Threshold

Initial value

3 000

3000

Setpoint values

High

Initial value

Low

Initial value

Counter output state

Here, the operating parameters are: l l l the threshold values, the setpoint values, the counter output states.

l l

The characteristics defined in the adjustment screen must, depending on the mode, be subject to: local: a global confirmation of the application, online: confirmation of the modifications in order to update the current parameters in the PLC and on the module channel.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General

Debugging an application-specific function

Introduction

Illustration

The Debug function of the module or the built-in application-specific interface l l l l l provides the tools to help with debugging of the application-specific function such as: display of module channel status, display of possible faults, control of language objects, and, in the event of a fault, access to the module or channel diagnostics,

...

This function is carried out in online mode , with the PLC in STOP or in RUN, from the PL7 debug editor.

The screen below is an example of a debug screen of an application-specific module

(application-specific module TSX DMZ 28DR).

TSX DMZ 28DR [OUTPUTS : POSITION 02]

Debug

Designation : 16I 24VDC+12Q REL TBLK

Global unforcing DIAG...

Fault Applied Q

STOP

Function Chan.

Symbol State

DIAG...

STOP

Control of channel

Forcing

F4 Force to 0

Write

Force to1

Unforce

Set

F8 Reset x l l

Here the debug tools are: forcing of the output channels to 0 or 1, access to module and channel diagnostics.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Presentation

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter presents the addressing and the exchange modes for language objects associated with PL7 specific applications.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

Topic

Addressing of language objects associated with specific applications

Implicit exchanges

Explicit exchanges

Presymbolization

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

2.1 Addressing of language objects associated with specific applications

Presentation

Aim of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section presents the addressing of language objects associated with application-specific modules.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Addressing of built-in application-specific interfaces

Addressing in-rack Input/Output module objects

Addressing of language objects associated with AS-i bus

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Addressing of built-in application-specific interfaces

At a Glance The Micro range provides up to 4 built-in application-specific interfaces, l l l l according to PLC type: terminal socket link, communication interface, analog channels, counting/down counting channels.

Illustration The illustration below locates each in-built interface for different PLC types.

Analog channels

Terminal socket link

Communication interface

Counting/down counting channels

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Channel number The table below provides the addressing of the different built-in application-specific channels.

PLC Terminal socket

Communicatio n interface

TSX 37-05/08/10 Channel

TSX 37-21

TSX 37-22

Channel 1

analog input channels

Channels 2 to 9

Analog output channel

Channel 10

Counting/down counting channels

Channels 11 and 12

Example %IW0.2

contains the channel 2 analog entry process value.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Addressing in-rack Input/Output module objects

At a Glance

Illustration

Addressing of main bit and word objects of input/output modules is done geographl l ically. That means that it depends: on the physical position of the module in the rack, on the module channel number.

Addressing is defined in the following way:

Symbol

I, Q, M, K

Object type

X, W, D, F

Format

Position i

Channel no.

Position

Syntax

Family

Symbol

Object type

Format (size)

Module position

Channel no.

The table below describes the different elements of addressing.

Element Values Description

X y

Picture of the physical input of the module,

Picture of the physical output of the module,

This information is exchanged automatically at each cycle of the task to which it is attached.

Internal variable.

This reading or writing information is exchanged as the application requires.

Internal constant.

This configuration information is available as read only.

Boolean.

For Boolean objects this element can be omitted.

16 bits

32 bits

Single length.

Double length.

32 bits

0 to 4

0 to 6

0 to 8

0 to 10

Floating point.

The floating format used is the IEEE Std 754-1985 standard (equivalent to

IEC 559).

Position number in the rack.

TSX 37-05

TSX 37-08

TSX 37-10

TSX 37-21/22

0 to 31 or

MOD

MOD: channel reserved for managing the module and the parameters common to all the channels.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Family

Position

Element r

Values

0 to 15 or

ERR

Description

Position of the bit in the word.

ERR: indicates a module or channel fault.

Examples

Object

%IW0.8

%I1.5

%Q1.2

%IW7.1

%I1.MOD.ERR

The table below presents some examples of object addressing.

Description Illustration

Process value of the channel 8 analog input of the built-in application-specific interface.

Channel 5 input status of TSX DMZ 64 DTK module situated in position 1 in the rack.

Channel 2 output status of TSX DMZ 64 DTK module situated in position 1 in the rack.

Channel 1analog input process value of TSX

AEZ 801 module situated in position 7 in the rack.

Information of a fault on TSX DMZ 64 DTK module situated in position 1 in the rack.

X m m c o

1 2 3

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Addressing of language objects associated with AS-i bus

At a Glance

Illustration

Addressing of the main bit and word objects linked to the AS-i bus is geographical.

That means that it is dependent on the number (address) of the slave device on the

AS-I bus.

Addressing is defined in the following way:

% I or Q

Symbol Object type

\ 4.0

Module/channel of

TSX SAZ 10

\ n

Slave number i

Bit position

Syntax

Family

Symbol

Object type

Module position

Channel no.

Slave number

Position

The table below describes the different elements of addressing.

0 n

Element Values Description

% -

Picture of the physical input of the module,

Picture of the physical output of the module,

This information is exchanged automatically at each cycle of the task to which it is attached.

Position number in the rack.

It is vital that the TSX SAZ10 module is positioned in slot 4.

0 to 31

0 to 3

The TSX SAZ 10 module only has one channel.

Physical slave address.

Position of the input or output bit image.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Example The table below presents some examples of object addressing.

Object

%I\4.0\2.1

%Q\4.0\6.3

Description

Input 1 of slave 2, with the module TSX SAZ 10 being positioned in slot

4 on rack 0.

Output 3 of slave 6, with the module TSX SAZ 10 being positioned in slot

4 on rack 0.

X c o m m

1 3

2 P ABE-8S40SB00

4 P

ZB2-BZS2@

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

2.2 Implicit exchanges

Presentation A built-in specific application interface where the addition of a module automatically enhances the application of language objects making it possible to program this interface or module.

These objects correspond to the images of the I/Os of the module or built-in specific application module.

The %I bits and the %IW words, images of the module's input values are updated automatically in the PLC processor at the start of the task, whether the task is in

RUN or STOP mode.

The %Q bits and %QW words, images of the module's output values are updated automatically in the module by the processor at the end of the task, with the task in

RUN mode.

Note: When the task in STOP mode, depending on the configuration chosen: l l the outputs are in the fallback position (fallback mode), the outputs are maintained at their last value (maintain mode).

Illustration The graph illustrates the operational cycle relating to a PLC task (cyclical execution).

Internal processing

Acquisition of input

RUN STOP

Program processing

Updating of output

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Examples

Object

%I13.1

%IW4.2

%IW3.2:X4

%Q6.5

%I6.5.ERR

%I7.MOD.ERR

The table below shows several examples of implicit exchanges relating to a given application.

Description Specific application

Discrete

Analog

Counting

Discrete

Gives the status of channel 1 of the module located in position 3.

Gives the analog value of channel 2 of the module located in position 4.

Gives the status of the capture input of the module located in position 3.

Gives the status of channel 5 of the module located in position 6.

Indicates, when the bit is set to 1, that channel 5 of the module located in position 6 is faulty.

Indicates, when the bit is set to 1, that the module located in position 7 is faulty.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

2.3 Explicit exchanges

Presentation

Aim of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section presents the principle of explicit exchanges as well as the different instructions which allow them to be carried out.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Explicit exchanges: General

READ_STS: Reading status words

WRITE_CMD: Writing command words

READ_PARAM: Reading adjustment parameters

WRITE_PARAM: Writing adjustment parameters

SAVE_PARAM: Saving adjustment parameters

RESTORE_PARAM: Restoring adjustment parameters

Exchange and report management

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Explicit exchanges: General

Introduction Explicit exchanges are exchanges carried out on request of the program user using instructions: l l l l l

READ_STS (reading status words),

WRITE_CMD (writing command words),

WRITE_PARAM (writing adjustment parameters),

READ_PARAM (reading adjustment parameters),

SAVE_PARAM (saving adjustment parameters), l RESTORE_PARAM (restoring adjustment parameters).

These exchanges apply to a group of %MW objects that are of the same type

(status, command or parameter) on the same channel.

Note: These objects are not essential when programming a application-specific function, but they carry extra information (eg: terminal block fault, module absent…) and the additional orders for advanced programming of the application specific functions (for more information on the explicit exchange Objects which are relative to a task, you can refer to the corresponding chapter).

General principles on the use of the explicit instructions

The diagram below presents the different kinds of explicit exchanges that are possible between the PLC’s processor and the module (or the built-in interface).

PLC processor

I/O module or interface built-in application

%MWy.i.r objects

%MWy.MOD.r (1)

Status words READ_STS

Status words

Command words

WRITE_CMD

Command words

Adjustment parameters: current

WRITE_PARAM

READ_PARAM

SAVE_PARAM

Adjustment parameters: current

Adjustment parameters: initial

RESTORE_PARAM

(1) Only with the instructions READ_STS and WRITE_CMD.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Managing exchanges

Objects associated with specific applications

During an explicit exchange, it may be interesting to monitor the progress that this makes, in order, for example, not to take into consideration the data read until the exchange has been carried out successfully.

For this, two kinds of information are available: l l the detection of an exchange which is in progress, the end of exchange report.

The diagram below describes the principal of the management of an exchange

Execution of an explicit exchange

Detection of an exchange in progress

Report of the end of the exchange

Logical channel

%CHy.i

The %CHy.i channel is a general syntax for updating all of the objects which are of the same type and linked to this channel or to this group of channels, via the explicit instructions.

Example: READ_STS%CH2.3

(reading the status words of channel 3 on module 2).

Note: In the case of a group of channels, the address used has to be the address of the first channel in the group of channels which is managed by the module.

Example: In the case of 32 discrete inputs (4 groups of 8 input channels, 0 to 7, 8 to 15, …) situated in slot 3. In order to read channel 12’s status words (fifth channel of the second group of channels), the syntax to use is: READ_STS%CH3.8

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

READ_STS: Reading status words

Introduction Status words contain information about the functioning state of the module or the channel.

The READ_STS instruction allows reading in the module (or in the built-in interface) of these kind of words. This reading updates the %MW status words .

These words can be used to carry out diagnostics by program.

Note: The status words are specific to each task. However, 2 words are used by l l all of the modules in the Micro range:

%MWy.MOD.2 (module level fault),

%MWy.i.2 (channel i level fault).

Illustration Writing instruction

Processor PLC

Objects %MWy.ir or %MWy.MOD.2

Status words READ_STS

E/S Module or interface built-in task

Status words

Syntax

Examples

The READ_STS instruction is defined in the following way :

READ_STS%CHy.i

The table below describes the different elements that are part of the instruction.

Element

READ_STS

%CH y

Description

Name of the instruction

Channel-type object

Module position.

Channel or MOD number.

The example below presents some examples of explicit exchanges using the

READ_STS instruction.

Object

READ_STS%CH2.1

READ_STS%CH1.MOD

Description

Reading the status words of channel 1, which is on the module situated in position 2.

Reading the status words of the module situated in position 1.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

WRITE_CMD: Writing command words

Introduction The command words act on the module or the channel (e.g.: reactivation of discrete outputs).

The WRITE_CMD instruction enables the %MW command words to be written to the module (or the built-in interface).

Note: The command words are specific to each application.

Illustration Write instruction

Processor PLC

Objects %MWy.i.r or %MWy.MOD.2

Command words

WRITE_CMD

E/S Module or interface built-in task

Command words

Syntax

Example

The WRITE_CMD instruction is defined as follows:

WRITE_CMD%CHy.i

The table below describes the different elements which constitute the instruction.

Element Description

WRITE_CMD Name of instruction.

%CH y

Channel-type object.

Module position.

Channel number.

The table below gives an example of an explicit exchange using the WRITE_CMD instruction.

Object

WRITE_CMD%CH3.0

Description

Writing the command information of channel 0 of the module located in position 3.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

READ_PARAM: Reading adjustment parameters

Introduction

Illustration

The READ_PARAM instruction enables the adjustment parameters of the module

(or built-in interface) to be read.

Reading updates the status words associated with the adjustment parameters

%MWy.i.r .

Read instruction

Processor PLC

%MWy.i.r objects

Current adjustment parameters

READ_PARAM

E/S Module or interface built-in task

Current adjustment parameters

Syntax

Example

The READ_PARAM instruction is defined as follows:

READ_PARAM%CHy.i

The table below describes the different elements which constitute the instruction.

Element Description

READ_PARAM Name of instruction.

%CH y

Channel-type object.

Module position.

Channel number.

The table below gives an example of an explicit exchange using the READ_PARAM instruction.

Object

READ_PARAM%CH3.1

Description

Reading the adjustment parameters of channel 1 of the module located in position 3.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

WRITE_PARAM: Writing adjustment parameters

Introduction

Illustration

The WRITE_PARAM instruction enables the adjustment parameters to be written to the module (or the built-in interface).

This instruction enables the adjustment values defined in the configuration contained in the %MWy.i.r words to be modified by the program .

Write instruction

Processor PLC

E/S Module or interface built-in task

%MWy.i.r objects

WRITE_PARAM

Adjustment parameters current

Syntax

Example

The WRITE_PARAM instruction is defined as follows:

WRITE_PARAM%CHy.i

The table below describes the different elements which constitute the instruction.

Element

WRITE_PARAM

%CH y

Description

Name of instruction.

Channel-type object.

Module position.

Channel number.

The table below gives an example of an explicit exchange using the

WRITE_PARAM instruction.

Object

WRITE_PARAM%CH3.1

Description

Writing the adjust parameters of channel 1 of the module located in position 3.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

SAVE_PARAM: Saving adjustment parameters

Introduction When modifying the module’s (or built-in interfaces’) adjustment parameters, the

SAVE_PARAM instruction allows you to save these new parameters and substitute them for the initial parameters.

These parameters replace the initial defined values with the help of the configuration editor (or of the last save ).

The SAVE_PARAM instruction is the equivalent to the order Services → Save parameters

Note: During a cold start, the current parameters (not saved) are replaced by the initial parameters.

Illustration Writing instruction

Processor PLC

%MWy.i.r objects

Adjustment parameters current

Adjustment parameters initial

SAVE_PARAM

E/S Module or interface built-in task

Adjustment parameters current

Syntax The SAVE_PARAM instruction is defined in the following way:

SAVE_PARAM%CHy.i

The table below describes the different elements that are part of the instruction.

Element

SAVE_PARAM

%CH y

Description

Name of the instruction.

Channel-type object.

Module position.

Channel number.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Example

Objects associated with specific applications

The table below presents an example of explicit exchange using the instruction

SAVE_PARAM.

Object

SAVE_PARAM%CH5.2

Description

Reading then saving the adjustment parameters of channel 2, which is part of the module situated in position 5.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

RESTORE_PARAM: Restoring adjustment parameters

Introduction

Illustration

The RESTORE_PARAM instruction allows you to restore the initial adjustment parameters (written during configuration or during the last save).

The RESTORE_PARAM instruction is the equivalent to the order Services → Save parameters

Writing instruction

Processor PLC

%MWy.i.r objects

Adjustment parameters current

RESTORE_PARAM

E/S Module or interface built-in task

Adjustment parameters current

Adjustment parameters initial

Syntax

Example

The RESTORE_PARAM instruction is defined in the following way:

RESTORE_PARAM%CHy.i

The table below describes the different elements that are part of the instruction.

Element Description

RESTORE_PARAM Name of the instruction

%CH y

Channel-type object.

Module position.

Channel number.

The table below presents an example of explicit exchange using the instruction

RESTORE_PARAM.

Object Description

RESTORE_PARAM%CH1.0

Writing the adjustment parameters of channel 0, which is part of the module situated in position 1.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Exchange and report management

Introduction When data is exchanged between the PLC memory and the module, several task cycles may be required for the exchange to be acknowledged by the interface card.

2 words are used to manage the exchanges: l l

%MWy.i.0: Exchange in progress,

%MWy.i.1: Report

Note: These words are described in detail in each part on specific applications.

Illustration The illustration below shows the various bits which are significant for exchange management.

Reconfiguration (X15)

Adjust (X2)

Command (X1)

State (X0)

%MWy.i.0

%MWy.i.1

Status words READ_STS

Command words

Adjustment parameters

WRITE_CMD

WRITE_PARAM

READ_PARAM

SAVE_PARAM

RESTORE_PARAM

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Description of significant bits

Each of the bits of the words %MWy.i.0 and %MWy.i.1 is associated with a type of parameter: l position 0 bits are associated with status parameters: l the bit %MWy.i.0:X0 indicates whether a status word read request is in progress, l l l position 1 bits are associated with command parameters: l the bit %MWy.i.0:X1 indicates whether the control parameters have been sent to channel i of the module, l the bit %MWy.i.1:X1 specifies whether the control parameters have been accepted by channel i of the module, position 2 bits are associated with adjustment parameters: l the bit %MWy.i.0:X2 indicates whether the adjustment parameters have been exchanged with channel i of the module (by WRITE_PARAM, READ_PARAM,

SAVE_PARAM, RESTORE_PARAM), l the bit %MWy.i.1:X2 specifies whether the adjustment parameters have been accepted by the module. If the exchange has been made successfully the bit is set to 0, the position 15 bits indicate that channel i of the module has been reconfigured from the terminal (modification of the configuration parameters + cold start of the channel).

Note: The exchange and report words also exist at module level (%MWy.MOD and

%MWy.MOD.1).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Example

Objects associated with specific applications

Phase 1: Transmission of data using the WRITE_PARAM instruction

PLC memory

Status words

Command words

Current adjustment parameters

E/S module memory or built-in application specific function

Status words

Command words

Current adjustment parameters

When the instruction is scanned by the PLC processor, the Exchange in progress bit is set to 1 in %MWy.

Phase 2: Analysis of data by the I/O module and report

PLC memory

Status words

Command words

Current adjustment parameters

E/S module memory or built-in application specific function

Status words

Command words

Current adjustment parameters

When data is exchanged between the PLC memory and the module, acknowledgment by the interface card is managed by the %MWy.i.1:X2 bit: Report

(0 = exchange successful, 1=exchange unsuccessful).

Note: There are no adjustment parameters at module level.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

2.4 Presymbolization

Presentation

Purpose of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section presents the presymbolization function for the objects of a specific application.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Presymbolized objects

Automatic symbolization of objects associated with a channel

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Presymbolized objects

Role

Syntax

Certain application specific functions (examples: counting, analog, ...) support an automatic symbolization of the objects which are linked to them.

If you give the generic symbol of the module’s %CHy.i channel, all of the symbols of the objects linked to this channel can then be automatically generated on request.

These objects are symbolized with the following syntax:

PREFIX_USER_SUFFIX_MANUFACTURER

The elements have the following meaning and characteristics:

Element

PREFIX_USER

SUFFIX_MANUFACT

URER

Maximum number of characters

Description generic symbol given to the channel by the user part of the symbol which corresponds to the bit object or word of the channel given by the system

Example

Note: As well as the symbol, a manufacturer’s comment is automatically generated, this comment recalls succinctly the object’s role.

This example shows a counting module situated in slot 3 of the automatic tray.

If the generic symbol (prefix-user) given to channel 0 is COMPT_PIECES , the following symbols are automatically generated.

Address Type

%CH3.0

%ID3.0

%ID3.0.4

%I3.0

%I3.0.1

DWORD

Symbol

COMPT_PIECES_CUR-MEAS

COMPT_PIECES_CAPT

Comment

Counter current value

Counter captured value

EBOOL COMPT_PIECES_ENAB_ACTIV Counter enable active

EBOOL COMPT_PIECES_PRES_DONE Preset done

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Objects associated with specific applications

Automatic symbolization of objects associated with a channel

Introduction

Conditions required

Procedure

The manufacturer's presymbolization (manufacturer's suffix) assigned to language objects is specific to each application. The detailed list of these suffixes is contained in the documentation relating to the specific application concerned.

Automatic symbolization implies that: l l the module has been declared in the PL7 configuration in advance.

the application-specific module accepts this function. The specific applications concerned are: l l l analog, counting, communication.

The table below shows the procedure for the automatic symbolization of objects associated with a channel.

Step

Action

Access the variable editor.

Access to I/O type variables.

Note: The channels whose objects can be symbolized have a letter P on the button to the left of the %CH address.

Double-click on the P button for the channel to be symbolized.

Enter the user prefix.

Note: If a symbol is already defined for the channel, the prefix proposed is the retrieved symbol truncated to 12 characters.

Confirm with the Presymbolize button.

De-activating automatic symbolization.

Canceling automatic symbolization, for a given logical channel, makes it possible to delete all or part of an object's symbols.

Two options are proposed:

If the option chosen is …

Delete all presymbols

Delete prefixed presymbols then …

No prefix is chosen: all symbols are deleted (including those which have been modified directly using the editor).

Only objects with a prefix identical to that entered are deleted.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Application-specific instructions

Presentation

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter presents the application-specific instructions.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Application-specific instructions

Accessing a specific function, method or procedure type instruction

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Application-specific instructions

Introduction Application-specific instructions (of function, method or procedure type) are programming instructions specific to an application-specific function which supplement the basic and advanced instructions.

They are defined in the documentation of each specific application.

The parameters are always the following PL7 language objects: words, word tables, immediate values.

Note: The Function type instructions require a supplementary memory application

(only when they are actually used in the program). This memory requirement is to be considered for each function however much it is used, and this should be done in accordance with the memory capacity of the PLC in question.

Example of a specific instruction

The (procedure type) DISPLAY_MSG function which is dedicated to operator dialog

(CCX 17) consoles is used to display a status message contained in the CCX 17 memory.

l l l

DISPLAY_MSG (ADR#0.0.4,%KW200,%MW10:4)

Each parameter has a particular meaning:

ADR#0.0.4

%KW200

...

is the console address,

contains the data to be sent,

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Application-specific instructions

Accessing a specific function, method or procedure type instruction

Presentation

Calling up a function

Application-specific function entry can be accessed by: l l directly entering the instruction and its parameters in an operate block, by the entry help function accessible through the program editors (LD, IL, ST).

Step

Action

Access the required editor.

Depending on the editor used, choose one of the following methods to open the function library.

l l l

Press Shift + F8 (LD, IL,ST editors).

Click on the (LD editor) icon.

Select the command Utilities

→

Note: The function library appears.

Enter call for a (IL, ST editors) function.

PL7 : Library functions

Function information Parameters

Family

Characters string

Communication

Call format

Lib.V. App.V

Name

2.00

SMOVE

Interpolation Command 1.0

Movement Command 2.00

3.07

Parameters of the METHOD:

Name Type Kind Comment

Channel MAIN Channel

NRUN WORD

G9 World

Movement number

Detail...

Comment

Automatic movement command

Family

%CH103.2

Display the call

SMOVE %CH103.2 ( 01.90.01.10000000.20000.0 )

OK Cancel

Select the specific application in the Family field.

Select the instruction in the Name field.

Many of the instructions have a customized entry help screen.

Access this screen by clicking on the Details button.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Application-specific instructions

Step

Action

Enter each instruction parameter (each instruction is developed in the relevant application-specific documentation) l in the customized screen or l in the Entry field in the Library Functions screen. To do this, the Parameter item must be selected in the Function Information field.

Click Ok to confirm.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Presentation

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces several elementary notions that are useful for the installation of application-specific functions.

Some of these notions are taken from the PL7 Installation and Start-up Guide.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Reminders concerning the configuration editor

The PL7 toolbar

The PL7 status bar

How to declare a module in a PLC rack

Confirming the configuration of a module.

Globally reconfiguring an application.

Application-specific fault processing (in-rack modules) by program

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Reminders concerning the configuration editor

Presentation

Illustration

The configuration editor enables the various constitutive elements of the PLC to be declared and configured in a graphical and intuitive manner: l l l rack, power supply, processor, l application-specific modules.

In online mode the configuration editor also performs debug, adjustment and diagnostics functions.

The following screen provides an example of a hardware configuration.

C o u n n g i t

A n a

TSX

3722

DMZ

28DR

DEZ

08A4

DSZ

08R5

AEZ

802

ASZ

401

DEZ

32D2

DSZ

32T2

Accessing the editor

The following table shows the different ways of accessing the configuration editor.

From: the menu bar the application browser

Action

Select Tools

→

Configuration .

Double-click on Hardware configuration or select it using the arrow keys and confirm with Enter .

Application Browser

Structure View

STATION

Configuration

Hardware configuration

Software configuration

Program

MAST Task

Events

DFB types

Variables

Animation tables

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

The PL7 toolbar

Presentation

Illustration

Elements and functions

The software's basic functions can be accessed quickly via the toolbar, using the mouse.

Access to the different functions is dynamic and varies according to the context.

The PL7 toolbar is displayed as follows:

This table gives the function of each element in the toolbar:

Element Function

New application

Element Function

Local mode

Open an application Online mode

Save the application

Print all or part of the application

Undo last modifications

Confirm modifications

Go to

Application browser

RUN

PLC changes to RUN

STOP

PLC changes to STOP

Start / Stop the animation

Organize windows so that they overlap

Tile windows horizontally

Tile windows vertically

Cross references

Function library

PLC <-> terminal transfer

Help

What's this?

Note: All these functions can also be accessed via the menu.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

The PL7 status bar

At a Glance The status bar, situated at the bottom of the screen, shows a range of information associated with operational aspects of the software.

Illustration The PL7 status bar appears thus:

Ready

2 3 4

ONLINE STOP U:SYS

5 6

GR7 OK MODIF

7 8

OVR CAPS

Elements and functions

This table describes the different zones that make up the status bar:

Number Zone

1 Information

Operating mode

PLC state

Function supplies information concerning menu commands, toolbar icons and the different editors when these are selected.

indicates the current operating mode (offline, online).

indicates the PLC state (Run, Stop, faulty, etc.).

Network address gives the network address of the PLC.

Grafcet mode indicates whether Grafcet mode is used in the application.

Modification in progress indicates that the current application has not been saved or is different from the back-up.

Animation indicator

Keyboard functions indicates that the PLC is in online mode.

indicates the status of the functions.

Insert and All Caps keyboard

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

How to declare a module in a PLC rack

Procedure This operation enables the user to make a software declaration of a module in a PLC rack.

The example below concerns a Discrete module; the same procedure is used whatever the type of in-rack module.

Step

Action

Access the application's hardware configuration screen.

Double-click on the slot in which the module is to be configured.

Result: the Add module screen appears.

Add modul

Family:

Analog Modules 1.5

Communication 1.5

Counting 1.5

Discrete 1.5

Simulation 1,0

Tout ou Rien1.5

Module:

TSX DEZ 08A5

TSX DEZ 12D2

TSX DEZ 12D2K

TSX DEZ 08A4

TSX DMZ 16DTK

TSX DPZ 10D2A

TSX DSZ 04T22

TSX DSZ 08T2

TSX DSZ 08T2K

TSX DSZ 08R5

8I 200-240VAC TBLK

12I 24VDC TBLK

12I 24VDC CONN

8I 115VAC TBLK

8I 24VDC+8Q 0,5A CONN

EMERG.STOP 8I 24VDC+2Q

4Q 2A 24VDC TBLK

8Q 0.5A 24VDC TBLK

8Q 0.5A 24VDC CONN

8Q REL TBLK

Cancel

Select the specific application (e.g.: Discrete ) in the Family field.

Select the module reference in the Module field.

Click on Ok to confirm the selection.

Result: the module is declared in its slot; the slot is shown in gray and contains the module reference. u n

C o i t n g

A n a

TSX

3722

DEZ

08A5

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Confirming the configuration of a module.

Introduction

Illustration

When a module is declared, and when the configuration or adjustment parameters are modified, this module's configuration must be confirmed.

The table below shows where the confirmation of a module's configuration is positioned within the various hardware installation phases of an application.

Step

Description

Declaration of a module:

Configuration of module channels.

Adjustment

Confirmation of the configuration of the module.

Declaration and/or parametering of new modules

Global confirmation of the application

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for confirming the configuration of a module.

Step

Action

Select Edit

→

Confirm or use the icon located in the toolbar.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Globally reconfiguring an application.

Introduction An application needs to be globally reconfigured in order for the modifications confirmed for each module to be taken into account. This is generally carried out in local mode,

Note: Global reconfiguration of an application in online mode causes the module to stop.

Illustration

Procedure

The table below shows where the global reconfiguration of an application is positioned within the various hardware installation phases of an application.

Step

Description

Declaration of a module:

Configuration of module channels

Adjustment

Confirmation of the configuration of the module

Declaration and/or parametering of new modules

Global confirmation of the application

The table below shows the procedure for globally reconfiguring a module.

Step

Action

Select Edit

→

Confirm ...

or use the icon located in the toolbar.

Confirm the reconfiguration:

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Application-specific fault processing (in-rack modules) by program

Presentation

Algorithm

Application-specific fault processing can be performed using the debugging and diagnostics screens.

It may however be advantageous to use a program to perform this processing.

The following algorithm is an application example of the detection and management application-specific (in rack) module faults by a program.

Test the %S10 bit

(general input/output default)

No default of input/output

%S10=0 ?

Yes

Locate the module at default in the rack

%Iy.MOD.ERR = 1

Diagnose the default module

READ_STS %CHy.MOD

%MWy.MOD.2

Locate the channel at default via

%Iy.i.ERR = 1

Diagnose the default channel

READ_STS %CHy.i

%MWy.i.2

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application

At a Glance

Aim of this Part

What's in this part?

This part presents the Discrete application-specific function on TSX37 PLCs and describes its installation using PL7 Micro, Junior and Pro software.

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter

Chaptername

General introduction to the discrete application -specific function

Discrete application configuration

Debugging discrete modules

Bits and words associated with discrete specific applications

Page

103

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General introduction to the discrete application -specific function

Introduction to the discrete application

Introduction The application-specific discrete function on the Micro applies to rack-mounted discrete input/output modules.

In order to install the discrete application, the physical context (processor and l l module type, and the position of the modules in the rack) must be defined and the necessary software installation carried out.

This second aspect will be carried out using the different PL7 editors: either in local mode, or in online mode. In this case, modification is limited to certain parameters.

Note: The application program can be created before the physical configuration to prevent it from being linked to a certain type of hardware. However, program execution will depend upon the definition of the physical configuration

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General introduction

Installation principles

Mode

Local

Local or online

Online

The table below shows the different installation phases of the discrete applicationspecific function.

Phase

Declaration of a module

Configuration of module channels

Description

Selection of the module and its geographical position

Entry of configuration parameters.

Confirmation of configuration parameters

(See Configuration of

discrete parameters, p. 80 )

Confirmation of module level.

Global confirmation of the application (See Confirming the configuration of a

module., p. 60 )

Confirmation of application level.

Programming

Transfer

Documentation

Debugging

Programming of functions to be performed by the application using: l l bit and word objects associated with the module, specific application instructions.

Transferring the application to the PLC.

Printing the different information relating to the application.

Debugging of the application using: l debugging help screens enabling the user to control inputs/ outputs, l diagnostics screens enabling the user to identify faults.

Note: The order shown above is given as an indication only. The PL7 software allows the editors to be used interactively in the order required (however, the data editor cannot be used if the input/output modules have not been configured first).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes the Configuration aspect of the installation of the discrete application.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

6.1

6.2

6.3

Topic

Configuring a discrete module: General

Discrete input/output channel parameters

Configuration of discrete parameters

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

6.1 Configuring a discrete module: General

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section

What's in this

Section?

This section describes the basic operations required for configuring a Discrete module.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Description of the configuration screen for a discrete module

How to access the configuration parameters of a discrete module.

Modifying the configuration parameters of a discrete module's: General

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

Description of the configuration screen for a discrete module

At a Glance

Illustration

The configuration screen of the module selected in the rack displays the parameters associated with the Discreteinput or output channels.

This screen gives access to parameter viewing and modification in local mode, and

Debugging in online mode.

TSX DMZ 28DTK [POSITION 01]

Configuration

Designation: 16E 24VCC+12S 0.5A CONN

Channel

Symbol Supply fault monitoring

Active

Task

MAST

Filtering

4 ms

Inputs

Function

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

Description The table below shows the different elements in the configuration screen and their functions.

Number Element

1 Title bar

Function

Indicates the reference of the selected module and its physical position in the rack.

Module zone Enables the user to select: l the installation phase: l l

Configuration ,

Debugging (diagnostics), only accessible in online mode.

l the type of channels (inputs or outputs), if the module in question has both inputs and outputs.

Displays the designation of the selected module.

According to the type of module, gives access to the configuration parameters which apply to all the channels of the same type of the module in question, such as: l l the type of inputs (positive or negative Logic), the network frequency, l ...

Displaying this zone is optional. The selection is made using the command View

→

Module zone .

Channel zone Enables the different channels to be parameterizeded. The Symbol column displays the symbol associated with the channel when this has been defined by the user (via the variables editor).

Note: For discrete modules with more than 16 channels of the same type, use the scrollbar to access the different groups of channels.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to access the configuration parameters of a discrete module.

Procedure This operation enables the user to access the configuration parameters for the channels of a discrete module.

Step Action

Access the module’s Hardware configuration screen.

Double-click on the module to be configured or select the module and execute the command Service

→

Open module .

For a standard format module which occupies two positions, double clicking on the high position will display the input channels parametering screen, and double clicking on the low position will display the output channels parametering screen.

Result : the configuration screen for the selected module appears.

TSX DMZ 28DT [POSITION 01]

Configuration

Designation: 16E 24VCC+12S 0.5A BORN

Inputs

Chann el

Symbol Supply fault monitoring

Enable

Task

MAST

Filtering

4 ms

Function

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

Some modules have a dialog box giving access to additional parameters. To access this dialog box:

Step

Action

Perform one of the following: l right click on the row in the table corresponding to the channel to be parametered and then select the Properties command from the pull-down l menu, or double left click on the row in the table corresponding to the channel to be l parameterized, or select the Function cell of the channel to be parameterized and then confirm using Enter .

Result: The dialog box appears, superimposed on the configuration screen.

TSX DMZ 28DT [POSITION 01]

Configuration

Designation: 16E 24VCC+12S 0.5A BORN

Inputs

Chann Symbol

Supply fault monitoring Task

Enable MAST

MAST

Filtering

4 ms

Function

Properties of Channel 0

Function

Normal

Latch state 0

Latch state 1

Event processing

Rising

Falling

EVT 0 x

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

Modifying the configuration parameters of a discrete module's: General

Introduction

Accessing the contextual menus

The configuration editor provides a set of functions which enable the user to input or l l l modify the parameters of modules such as: contextual menus, single or multiple selection of channels, cutting/pasting of parameters (using the contextual menus).

These can be accessed by right-clicking with the mouse, and give quick access to the main commands.

If the element to be selected is... Then the available functions are...

the cell Copy parameters

Paste parameters the module zone (except in tables) Undo modifications

Confirm

Animate

Selecting a channel or cell

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a module channel cell or channel.

Step

Action

Left-click on the required cell or channel number.

Selecting a group of consecutive channels

Selecting a group of nonconsecutive channels

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of consecutive channels of a module.

Step

Action

Select the first channel.

Press Shift and click on the last channel.

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of non-consecutive channels of a module.

Step

Action

Select the first channel.

Press Ctrl and click on each of the channels in turn.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

Selecting a group of consecutive cells

The table below shows the procedure for selecting a group of consecutive cells of a module.

Step

Action

Select the first cell.

Move the mouse up or down whilst holding down the mouse button, then release the button when the last cell has been reached.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

6.2

Discrete application configuration

Discrete input/output channel parameters

At a Glance

Aim of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the different input and output channel parameters by discrete module type.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Discrete inputs parameters

Discrete output parameters

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

Discrete inputs parameters

Key:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

At a Glance Discrete input modules contain parameters per channel, or per group of consecutive channels.

Parameters The table below shows the parameters available for each discrete input module.

Module reference

TSX DEZ 08A4

TSX DEZ 08A5

TSX DEZ 12D2

TSX DEZ 12D2K

No. of inputs Associated task (1)

Function (2) Filtering

(group of 4 channels)

Type of logic

8 20 ms -

Mast / Fast

/ None

Mast / Fast

/ None

Mast / Fast

/ None

Mast / Fast

/ None

20 ms

4 ms or (4)

positive negative

4 ms or (4) -

Networ k

50 Hz

60 Hz

50 Hz

60 Hz

TSX DEZ 32D2 32 -

TSX DPZ 10D2A

TSX DMZ 16DTK 8 (inputs)

TSX DMZ 28DT

8 (inputs)

16 (inputs)

TSX DMZ 28DTK 16 (inputs)

Mast / Fast

/ None

Normal or (3) 4 ms or (4) -

Mast / Fast

/ None

4 ms or (4) -

Mast / Fast

/ None

4 ms or (4) -

Mast / Fast

/ None

Normal or (3) 4 ms or (4) -

Mast / Fast

/ None

Normal or (3) 4 ms or (4) -

TSX DMZ 28DR 16 (inputs)

TSX DMZ 28AR 16 (inputs)

Mast / Fast

/ None

Normal or (3) 4 ms or (4) positive / negative

Mast / Fast

/ None

Normal or (3) 20 ms 50 Hz /

60 Hz

Supply fault monitoring

Active /

Inactive

Active /

Inactive

Active /

Inactive

Active /

Inactive

Active /

Inactive

Active /

Inactive

Active /

Inactive

Active /

Inactive

Active /

Inactive

Active /

Inactive

Active /

Inactive

Group of 8 consecutive channels, except for the last group if this has less than eight channels.

Only available on channels 0, 1, 2, 3 and 8 of the module situated in slot 1.

Latching 0 or 1, event processing on rising edge (RE), or on falling edge (FE).

0.1 to 7.5 ms

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Key:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Discrete application configuration

Module reference

No. of inputs Associated task (1)

Function (2) Filtering

(group of 4 channels)

Type of logic

TSX DMZ 64DTK 32 (inputs) Mast / Fast

/ None

Normal or (3) 4 ms or (4) -

Networ k

Supply fault monitoring

Active /

Inactive

Group of 8 consecutive channels, except for the last group if this has less than eight channels.

Only available on channels 0, 1, 2, 3 and 8 of the module situated in slot 1.

Latching 0 or 1, event processing on rising edge (RE), or on falling edge (FE).

0.1 to 7.5 ms

Note: l l

Parameters in bold correspond to the parameters configured by default.

When a group of channels is not assigned to a task None ), the corresponding channels are not exchanged by the system.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

Discrete output parameters

At a Glance The discrete output modules contain parameters per channel or per group of consecutive channels.

Parameters

Module reference

No. of outputs

TSX DSZ 04T22 4

TSX DSZ 08R5

TSX DSZ 08T2

TSX DSZ 08T2K 8

TSX DSZ 32R5

TSX DSZ 32T2

TSX DMZ 16DTK 8 (outputs)

TSX DMZ 28AR

TSX DMZ 28DR 12 (outputs)

TSX DMZ 28DT

The table below shows the parameters available for each discrete output module.

12 (outputs)

TSX DMZ 28DTK 12 (outputs)

TSX DMZ 64DTK 32 (outputs)

TSX DPZ 10D2A 2 (outputs)

Associated task (1)

Mast

/ Fast / None

Reactivate

Programmed /

Automatic

Programmed /

Automatic

Programmed /

Automatic

Programmed /

Automatic

Programmed /

Automatic

Programmed /

Automatic

Programmed /

Automatic

Programmed /

Automatic

Fallback mode Supply fault monitoring

Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Active / Inactive

Active / Inactive Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Active

/ Inactive

Active / Inactive Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Active

/ Inactive

Active / Inactive Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Fallback to 0/

Maintain state

Active

/ Inactive

Key:

(1) Group of 8 consecutive channels, except for the last group if this has less than eight channels.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

Note: l l

Parameters in bold correspond to the parameters configured by default.

When a group of channels is not assigned to a task None , the corresponding channels are not exchanged by the input/output system.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

6.3 Configuration of discrete parameters

Presentation

Aim of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section presents the installation of different discrete I/O channel configuration parameters.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

How to modify the Task parameter of a discrete module

How to modify the Monitoring the external supply parameter for a discrete module

How to modify the Functions parameter of a discrete module.

How to modify the Type of inputs parameter of a discrete module

How to modify the Network frequency parameter of a discrete module

How to modify the Filtering time parameter for 24 DCV inputs of a discrete module

How to modify the Fallback mode parameter of a discrete module

How to modify the Reactivation of outputs parameter of a discrete module.

How to parameterize the RUN/STOP input of a discrete module

How to parameterize the save program and %MW input of a discrete module

How to parameterize the alarm output of a discrete module

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to modify the Task parameter of a discrete module

At a Glance This parameter defines the processor task in which inputs are acquired and outputs are updated.

The task is defined for 8 consecutive channels.

Note: If the module consists of a number of inputs which is not a multiple of 8, the last group will be made up of a number of channels between 1 and 7.

The possible choices are as follows: l l l the the

MAST

FAST

None

task

if the group of channels is not used.

It is advisable to deconfigure the groups of channels not used in the application. As a result, even if no connector is connected, the module will not indicate a fault.

Note: This parameter can only be modified in local mode.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the type of task assigned to the channels of a module.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

In the pull-down menu located in the Task column, click on the button for the required group of channels.

Result : a pull-down list appears.

MAST

FAST

None

Note : For discrete modules with more than 16 channels, use the scrollbar to access the different groups of channels.

Select the required task.

Note : Selecting None causes the group of channels in question and the following groups to be deconfigured, after the modification is confirmed.

Reconfiguration ( MAST or FAST selection) of a group of deconfigured channels will, after the modification is confirmed, cause the preceding nonconfigured groups to be reconfigured.

Confirm the deconfiguration or reconfiguration if necessary.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to modify the Monitoring the external supply parameter for a discrete module

At a Glance

Procedure

This parameter defines the status (activated or deactivated) of external supply fault monitoring.

It works on groups of 16 consecutive channels.

By default checking is active (box checked).

The table below shows the procedure for activating or deactivating the Monitoring external supply fault function.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

For the required group of channels, click on the check box situated in the

Supply fault monitoring column.

Note: For discrete modules with more than 16 channels, use the scrollbar to access the different groups of channels.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to modify the Functions parameter of a discrete module.

At a Glance This parameter enables the user to assign to the first four input channels (%l1.0 to l l

% l1.3) of a discrete module located in position 1, a specific function, such as: normal (no event associated with the channel), channel by channel latching,

This function is used to take into account a short duration pulse (less than one

PLC cycle time) in order to process it in the next cycle.

Acknowledgement of the pulse occurs when the input state changes: l l

Latch state 1: change from state 0 to state 1,

Latch state 0: change from state 1 to state 0.

Note: The switch to latching can be accessed in either local or online mode.

l channel by channel event processing,

This function is used to acknowledge events so that they are immediately processed (uninterrupted processing).

The possible choices are as follows: l event triggered on a rising edge (RE) of the pulse (state 0 -> state 1), l event triggered on a falling edge (FE) of the pulse (state 1 -> state 0),

Event entries are associated with a processing number ( Evt ). These numbers l l range from:

1 to 8 on the TSX 37-10 PLC,

0 to 15 on the TSX 37-21/22 PLC.

Note: The switching to event processing can be accessed in either local or online mode.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for accessing the various functions.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the module situated in position 1.

Select the required channel.

In the Function column, double click on one of the first four cells of the channel to be parameterized.

Result : the properties dialog box appears.

Channel 3 function

OFF

Normal

Latch state 0

Latch state 1

Channel processing

Rising

Falling

EVT 1

Select the required function.

If necessary, enter the event number Evti .

Repeat the operation for every channel to be configured (from step 2).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to modify the Type of inputs parameter of a discrete module

At a Glance This parameter defines the type of inputs of the modules TSX DEZ 12D2 and

TSX DMZ 28DR .

It applies to all the module’s inputs.

l l

The possible choices are as follows: positive logic inputs: Sink (common to + supply sensors, negative logic inputs: Source (common to - supply sensors).

Note: This parameter can only be modified in local mode.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the type of inputs assigned to the module.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Click on the Positive logic / Negative logic check box, located in the Type of input field.

Result : the type of input chosen will be assigned to the module in this way.

TSX DMZ 28DR [INPUTS: POSITION 01]

Configuration Inputs

Designation: 16E 24VCC+12S REL.BORN

Type of inputs

Positive logic

Negative logic

Sink Source

CAUTION: This action will mean the position of the switch on the card must be changed!

Note : Modifying the type of input implies: l the corresponding modification of the position of the switch situated on the module, l different input connections depending on whether the inputs are at Positive logic (sink) or at Negative logic (source).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to modify the Network frequency parameter of a discrete module

At a Glance This parameter is used to adapt alternating inputs to the network frequency (50 or

60 Hz) of the TSX DEZ 08A4 , TSX DEZ 08A5 and TSX DMZ 28AR modules

(inputs).

It applies to all the module’s inputs.

Note: The network frequency can only be modified in local mode.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the Network frequency assigned to the module.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Click on the 50Hz / 60Hz check box located in the module zone of the

Network field.

Result : the network frequency chosen will therefore be assigned to the module.

Configuration

Network

50 Hz

60 Hz

TSX DMZ 28AR [INPUTS: POSITION 03]

Inputs

Designation: 16E 115VCA+12S REL.BORN

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to modify the Filtering time parameter for 24 DCV inputs of a discrete module

At a Glance This parameter defines the filtering period for the selected channel.

The filtering time is defined for a group of 4 consecutive channels and may vary between 0.1 and 7.5 ms in increments of 0.5 ms.

Note: The filtering time can only be modified in local mode.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for defining the Filtering time parameter.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

In the pull-down menu located in the Filtering column, click on the button for the required group of channels.

Result : a pull-down list appears.

ChannelSymbol

Supply fault monitoring Task

Enable MAST

MAST

Filtering

4 ms

3 ms

3.5 ms

4 ms

4.5 ms

5 ms

4 ms

Function

3 Select the required filtering period.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to modify the Fallback mode parameter of a discrete module

At a Glance

Procedure

This parameter defines the fallback mode adopted by outputs when the PLC changes to Stop, in the event of a processor or rack fault.

The possible modes are as follows: l l l l

Fallback to 0 : the outputs are set at state 0,

Maintain state : the outputs remain in the state in which they were before the change to Stop.

This parameter applies: to all the outputs of a module for half format modules or mixed module outputs, to the even or odd position for a 32 output channel module.

The table below shows the procedure for defining the Fallback mode assigned to a group of channels.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Click on the Fallback to 0 / Maintain state check box located in the module zone of the Fallback mode field.

Result : the fallback mode chosen will then be assigned to the module.

TSX DMZ 28AR [INPUTS: POSITION 06]

Configuration

Designation: 16E 115VCA+12S REL.BORN

Fallback mode on failure

Fallback to 0

Maintain state

Outputs

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to modify the Reactivation of outputs parameter of a discrete module.

At a Glance

Procedure

This parameter defines the reactivation mode of static outputs.

The possible modes are as follows: l Programmed : reactivation is executed by a PLC application command. In order to avoid closely spaced, repetitive reactivation, the module automatically allows l a period of 10 seconds between two reactivations,

Automatic : reactivation is carried out automatically every 10 seconds until the fault disappears.

l l

This parameter applies: to all the outputs of a module for half format modules or mixed module outputs, to the even or odd position for a 32 output channel module.

The table below shows the procedure for defining the reactivation of outputs.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Click on the Programmed / Automatic check box located in the module zone of the Reactivation after short-circuit field.

Result : the reactivation of outputs chosen will then be assigned to the module.

TSX DMZ 28DT [OUTPUTS: POSITION 04]

Configuration

Designation: 16E 24VCC+12S 0.5A BORN

Fallback mode on failure

Fallback to 0

Maintain state

Reset after short-circuit

Programmed

Automatic

Outputs

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to parameterize the RUN/STOP input of a discrete module

At a Glance The discrete input (%I1.8) can be parameterized to control the starting (Run) or stopping (Stop) of the execution of the application program.

Note: The change to Stop via the physical input %11.8 takes priority over a change to Run command from a terminal or network.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for parameterizing the Run/Stop input.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Double click on the 0 position.

Result : The processor configuration screen appears.

TSX 3722 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]

Configuration

Designation: Processor 3722

Operating Mode

%I1.8 Run/Stop

%Q2.0 Alarm

%I1.9 Save program and first %MWi

Auto. Start in Run

%MWi Reset on cold start

Memory Card

None

Tasks

MAST

Cyclic

Periodic

Watchdog

FAST

Period:

Watchdog

250

0 ms ms

FIPIO mode

Cycle time of network (calculated)

Controlled

Free ms

100

5 ms ms

FIPIO mode

Cycle time of network (calculated)

Controlled

Free ms

3 Check the %I1.8 Run/Stop box in the Operating mode field.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to parameterize the save program and %MW input of a discrete module

At a Glance

Procedure

The discrete input (%11.9) can be assigned to the save program and %MWi internal words function.

Thus, when input %I1.9 is rising edge, this starts the RAM -> FLASH EPROM transfer of the program application and the %Mwi.

The table below shows the procedure for configuring the %I1.9 input as a save program and %MWi input.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Double click on the 0 position.

Result : The processor configuration screen appears.

TSX 3722 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]

Configuration

Designation: Processor 3722

Operating Mode

%I1.8 Run/Stop

%Q2.0 Alarm

%I1.9 Save program and first %MWi

Auto. Start in Run

%MWi Reset on cold start

Memory Card

None

Tasks

MAST

Cyclic

Periodic

Watchdog

FAST

Period:

Watchdog

250

0 ms ms

FIPIO mode

Cycle time of network (calculated)

Controlled

Free ms

100

5 ms ms

FIPIO mode

Cycle time of network (calculated)

Controlled

Free ms

3 Check the %I1.9 Save program and first %MWi box in the Operating mode field.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Discrete application configuration

How to parameterize the alarm output of a discrete module

At a Glance

Procedure

The discrete output (%Q2.0) can be assigned to the Alarm function.

Then, as soon as a blocking fault appears, output %Q2.0, normally at state 1, switches to state 0.

The table below shows the procedure for assigning the Alarm function to the output.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen of the required module.

Double click on the 0 position.

Result : The processor configuration screen appears.

TSX 3722 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]

Configuration

Designation: Processor 3722

Operating Mode

%I1.8 Run/Stop

%Q2.0 Alarm

%I1.9 Save program and first %MWi

Auto. Start in Run

%MWi Reset on cold start

Memory Card

None

Tasks

MAST

Cyclic

Periodic

Watchdog

FAST

Period:

Watchdog

250

0 ms ms

FIPIO mode

Cycle time of network (calculated)

Controlled

Free ms

100

5 ms ms

FIPIO mode

Cycle time of network (calculated)

Controlled

Free ms

3 Check the %Q2.0 Alarm box in the Operating mode field.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging discrete modules

At a Glance

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes the Debug aspect of the installation of the discrete application.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introduction to the debug function of a discrete module.

Description of the debug screen for a discrete module.

How to access the channels debug screen of a discrete module.

How to access the Diagnostics function for a discrete module

Accessing the forcing/unforcing function

How to access the SET and RESET commands

How to access the reactivation of outputs command

Maintain outputs for a discrete module

Page

100

101

102

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging discrete modules

Introduction to the debug function of a discrete module.

Introduction The Debug function enables the user to view the parameters of each channel

(symbol, channel status, etc.) for each of the application's discrete input/output modules, and to access diagnostics and adjustment for the selected channel in the event of a fault being present.

The function also gives access to the module diagnostics in the event of a fault.

Note: This function can only be accessed in online mode.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging discrete modules

Description of the debug screen for a discrete module.

At a Glance

Illustration

The debug screen displays the value and state of each of the selected module's channels in real time. It is also used to access the channel commands (forcing of the input/output value, Set/Reset an output, etc.).

The debug screen looks like this:

TSX DMZ 64DTK [OUTPUTS . POSITION 02]

Debugging

Designation: 32E 24VCC+32S 0.1A CONN

Reactivation Global unforcing

Outputs

Channel

Symbol State

Error

ERR

Fallback

STOP

DIAG…

Function

ALARM

Channel 4 commands x

Forcing

F4 Force to 0

F5 Force to 1

Write

Unforce

Set

F8 Reset

Description

Number

The table below shows the different elements in the debug screen and their functions.

Element

Title bar

Function

Indicates the reference of the selected module and its physical position in the PLC.

Module zone Enables the user to select: l parameter type: l l

Configuration ,

Debugging (diagnostics), can only be accessed in online mode.

l channel type (inputs or outputs) displayed, if the module in question contains both inputs and outputs or the position (even or odd) for 32 channel modules.

Displays the designation of the selected module.

Provides direct access to: l l the Global unforcing function for channels, the module diagnostics, if the module is faulty (shown by the indicator integrated in the diagnostics access button, DIAG , which turns red).

l the Reactivation of outputs function ( for static output modules).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging discrete modules

Number

Element Function

Channel zone Displays, in real time, the value and status of each of the channels of the module. The

Symbol column displays the symbol associated with the channel when this has been defined by the user (via the variables editor).

Note: This zone also enables the user to display specific functions associated with the inputs %I1.0..%I1.3 and the output %Q2.0 of the discrete module.

Command zone

Gives access to the commands for a channel

Note: When a "counting application" function is associated with one of the first four inputs of the discrete module located in slot 1, an icon allows access to the adjustment and debug screens of this function (see).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging discrete modules

How to access the channels debug screen of a discrete module.

At a Glance

Procedure

This operation enables the user to access the debug screen for the channels of a discrete module.

The debug screen can only be accessed in online mode.

The table below shows the procedure for accessing the Debug function.

Step

Action

Access the hardware configuration screen.

Double click on the module to be configured or select the module then execute the command Service

→

Open module .

Result : The configuration screen for the selected module appears.

TSX DMZ 64DTK [OUTPUTS: POSITION 02]

Debugging

Designation: 32E 24VCC+32S 0.1A CONN

Reactivation Global unforcing

Outputs

DIAG…

Channel

Symbol State

Error

ERR

Fallback

STOP

Function

ALARM

Channel 4 commands x

Forcing

F4 Force to 0

F5 Force to 1

Write

Unforce

F7 Set

F8 Reset

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging discrete modules

How to access the Diagnostics function for a discrete module

At a Glance

Procedure

The module Diagnostics function displays the current faults, if there are any, classified according to their category: l l l internal faults (module failure), external faults (tripped output, sensor or actuator supply fault), other faults (module missing or switched off).

The DIAG indicator turns red to indicate a faulty module l in the configuration editor at rack level: l l the module position indicator, in the configuration editor at module level: l the Diag indicator.

The table below shows the procedure for accessing the module Diagnostics screen.

Step

Action

Access the module's debug screen.

Click on the Diag button in the module zone.

Result: The list of module faults appears.

Module Diagnostics

Internal faults External faults Other faults

Faulty channel(s)

Note: If a configuration fault occurs, in the event of a major failure or missing module, the module diagnostics screen cannot be accessed. The following message then appears on the screen: Module is missing or different from that configured in this position .

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging discrete modules

Accessing the forcing/unforcing function

Presentation

Procedure

This function is used to modify the status of all or part of a module's channels.

The status of a forced output is fixed and can only be modified by the application after unforcing.

Note: However, when a fault causes the outputs to fall back, the status of these channels takes the value set when the fallback mode parameter was configured.

The available commands are as follows: l for one or more channels: l forcing to 1, l l forcing to 0, l unforcing (when the selected channel(s) is (are) forced), for all channels of a module (when at least one channel is forced): l global unforcing of channels.

The table below shows the procedure for forcing or unforcing all or part of the channels of a module.

See

Modifying the configuration parameters of a discrete module's: General, p. 73

for multiple selection.

Step

Action for one channel

Access the module's debug screen.

In the Status column, double-click on the cell of the required channel (1).

Select the required function.

Action for all channels

Click on the Global unforcing button in the module zone.

Key:

(1) The Channel commands screen can also be accessed by double-clicking on the required channel and then left-clicking on the Command button.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging discrete modules

How to access the SET and RESET commands

At a Glance These commands are used to modify the state of a module's outputs to 0 (RESET) or 1 (SET).

Note: The state of the output assigned by one of these commands is temporary and can be modified at any time by the application when the PLC is in RUN.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for assigning the value 0 or 1 to all or part of the channels of a module.

See (

Modifying the configuration parameters of a discrete module's: General, p. 73)

for multiple selection.

Step

Action for one channel

Access the module's debug screen.

In the Status column, double click on the cell of the required channel (1).

Select the required function.

Key:

(1) The Channel commands screen can also be accessed by double-clicking on the required channel and then left-clicking on the Command button.

100

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging discrete modules

How to access the reactivation of outputs command

At a Glance

Procedure

If a fault has caused the outputs to trip, this command is used to reactivate all the outputs (configured in programmed reactivation) if no fault persists at their terminals.

The table below shows the procedure for reactivating tripped outputs.

Step

Action

Access the debug screen of the module in question.

Click on the Reactivate button, located in the module zone.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

101

Debugging discrete modules

Maintain outputs for a discrete module

At a Glance This check (red Stop indicator on) informs the user that, for a given output channel l l group, these outputs are not being correctly maintained by the PLC (fallback state).

The possible causes are as follows: processor fault, rack fault.

102

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Bits and words associated with discrete specific applications

Presentation

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter presents the different word and bit objects associated with discrete specific applications as well as their addressing mode.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

8.1

8.2

Topic

Addressing of discrete I/O module objects

Language objects associated with the discrete specific application

Page

104

105

103

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Language words and bits

8.1 Addressing of discrete I/O module objects

Addressing discrete input/output module objects

At a Glance

Illustration

Addressing of bit and word objects for input/output modules is defined in the part entitled Shared applications (See Addressing of language objects associated with

specific applications, p. 26).

This page describes the specific features linked to the discrete input/output modules.

Reminder of the principles of addressing:

% I, Q, M, K X, W or D

Symbol Object type Format x

Position i r

Channel no. Position

Specific values The table below shows the values specific to discrete input/output module objects.

Element Values Comment

0 to 63 or

MOD

MOD: channel reserved for management of the module and the parameters shared by all channels.

r 0 to 3 or

ERR

ERR: indicates a module or channel fault.

104

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

8.2

Language words and bits

Language objects associated with the discrete specific application

Presentation

Aim of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section presents the different language objects associated with the discrete specific application.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Implicit exchange objects

Exchange management: Module %MWx.MOD.0:Xj or channel %MWx.i.0:Xj exchanges in progress

Exchange management: Module %MWx.MOD.1:Xj or channel %MWx.i.1:Xj report

Explicit exchange objects: General

Explicit exchange objects: Status Module %MWx.MOD.2:Xj

Explicit exchange object: Command Word %MWxMOD.3:Xj

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

105

Language words and bits

Implicit exchange objects

At a Glance Exchanges for these objects are carried out automatically on each cycle of the task in which the module channels are configured.

Bit objects

Address

%Ix.i

The table below shows the different implicit exchange bit objects.

Function

Input channel bit

%Qx.i

%Ix.i.ERR

Output channel bit

Channel error bit

%Ix.MOD.ERR

Module error bit

Meaning when the bit is at state 1

Indicates for input channel i that the output of the sensor controlling the input is activated.

Indicates that output channel i is activated.

Indicates that input channel i is faulty.

Indicates that the module is faulty.

106

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Language words and bits

Exchange management: Module %MWx.MOD.0:Xj or channel %MWx.i.0:Xj exchanges in progress

At a Glance

Description

These word-type objects provide information on the module or channel i exchanges in progress.

They are updated automatically by the system.

The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word

%MWx.MOD.0

Address

%MWx.MOD.0:X0

%MWx.MOD.0:X1

Meaning for Xj = 1

Exchange of status words in progress on at least one channel of the module.

Exchange of command words in progress on at least one channel of the module.

Description

Example

The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word %MWx.i.0

Address

%MWx.i.0:X0

%MWx.i.0:X1

Meaning for Xj = 1

Exchange of status words in progress on channel i.

Exchange of command words in progress on channel i.

The example below shows one possible way in which this type of word can be used

(* Update request for channel 0 status words *)

(* for the module located at slot 3*)

(* if no exchange in progress on this channel *)

IF NOT %MW3.0:X0 THEN READ_STS %CH3.0;

END_IF;

Note: When the duration of the explicit exchange is shorter than the PLC task cycle time, the %MWx.i:X0 bit never switches to 1.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

107

Language words and bits

Exchange management: Module %MWx.MOD.1:Xj or channel %MWx.i.1:Xj report

At a Glance

Description

These word-type objects provide information on the exchange reports for the module or channel i.

They are updated automatically by the system.

The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word

%MWx.MOD.1

Address

%MWx.i.1:X0

%MWx.i.1:X1

Meaning for Xj = 1

Status parameter exchange error on at least one channel of the module.

Command parameter exchange error on at least one channel of the module.

Description

Example

The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word %MWx.i.1

Address

%MWx.i.1:X0

%MWx.i.1:X1

Meaning for Xj = 1

Status parameter exchange error on channel i.

Command parameter exchange error on channel i.

The example below shows one possible way in which this type of word can be used

(* Status error detected on module *)

(* located at slot 3 *)

IF NOT %MW3.MOD.0:X0 THEN READ_STS %CH3.MOD;

END_IF;

IF %MW3.MOD.1:X0 THEN SET %M100;

END_IF;

108

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Language words and bits

Explicit exchange objects: General

At a Glance Explicit exchange objects carry information (e.g. terminal block fault, module missing, etc.) and additional commands for advanced programming of application specific functions.

Note: The configuration constants %KWx.i.r, which are not documented in this manual, can only be accessed in read mode and correspond to the configuration parameters entered using the Configuration editor.

Explicit exchange objects are exchanged at the request of the user program using the following instructions: l l l l l l

READ_STS (read status words),

WRITE_CMD (write command words),

WRITE_PARAM

READ_PARAM

SAVE_PARAM

(write adjustment parameters),

(read adjustment parameters),

(save adjustment parameters),

RESTORE_PARAM (restore adjustment parameters).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

109

Language words and bits

Explicit exchange objects: Status Module %MWx.MOD.2:Xj

At a Glance

Description

This word-type object provides information on the status of the module.

The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word:

%MWx.MOD.2

Address

%MWx.MOD.2:X0

%MWx.MOD.2:X1

%MWx.MOD.2:X2

%MWx.MOD.2:X3

%MWx.MOD.2:X4

%MWx.MOD.2:X5

%MWx.MOD.2:X6

%MWx.MOD.2:X7

%MWx.MOD.2:X8

%MWx.MOD.2:X9

%MWx.MOD.2:X10 to X15

Bit position Meaning for Xj = 1

0 Internal error Module inoperative.

Reserved.

Module Missing or Switched Off

10 to 15

Reserved.

Tripped Output.

Sensor or Actuator Supply Fault.

Reserved.

110

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Language words and bits

Explicit exchange object: Command Word %MWxMOD.3:Xj

At a Glance

Description

This word-type object is a command word. It is written by the application or from the

Debug screen for the reactivation command.

The table below explains the meanings of the different bits in the word:

%MWx.MOD.3

Meaning for Xj = 1 Address Bit position

%MWx.MOD.3:X0 0

%MWx.MOD.3:X1 to 3 1 to 3

%MWx.MOD.3:X4 4

%MWx.MOD.3:X5

%MWx.MOD.3:X6

%MWx.MOD.3:X7

%MWx.MOD.3:X8 to 11 8 to 11

%MWx.MOD.3:X12 12

%MWx.MOD.3:X13

%MWx.MOD.3:X14

%MWx.MOD.3:X15

Reactivation of tripped outputs.

Reserved.

Inhibiting the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 0 to 15.

Confirming the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 0 to 15.

Inhibiting the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 16 to 31.

Confirming the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 16 to 31.

Reserved.

Inhibiting the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 0 to 15.

Confirming the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 0 to 15.

Inhibiting the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 16 to 31.

Confirming the monitoring of the external supply fault for the channels 16 to 31.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

111

Language words and bits

112

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i Bus

III

At a Glance

Aim of this part

What's in this part?

This part introduces the AS-i bus on PLC TSX37 and describes its implementation using the software PL7 Micro, Junior and Pro.

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter

Chaptername

General introduction to the AS-i Bus

AS-i bus configuration

Debugging the AS-i bus

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

AS-i operating mode

AS-i performance

Page

113

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i Bus

114

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General introduction to the AS-i

Bus

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the AS-i bus on PLC TSX37 and describes how to access the various application specific editors.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introduction to the AS-i Bus

Architecture of the TSX SAZ 10 module

Structure of an AS-i slave

How to declare an AS-i communication module in the PLC rack

How to access the AS-i Bus configuration

Page

115

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i Bus

Introduction to the AS-i Bus

At a Glance The AS-i (Actuator Sensor-Interface) Bus is used for the interconnection, on a single cable, of sensors/actuators at the lowest level of automation.

These sensors/actuators will be defined in the documentation as slave devices .

The implementation of the AS-i application requires you to define the physical context into which the application will be integrated (PLC rack, modules, AS-i slave devices connected on the bus) and then to complete the software implementation.

l l

This second aspect will be carried out from the different PL7 editors: either in local mode, or in connected mode; in this case modification is limited to certain parameters.

Implementation principles

Mode

Local

Local or connected

The table below shows the different implementation phases for the AS-i bus.

Phase

Declaration of module

Description

Installation in the rack slot.

Declaration of slave devices Selection for each device: l l of its slot number on the bus, of the slave type.

Input of the configuration parameters.

Configuration of the module channel (See AS-i bus

configuration, p. 123

)

Confirmation on the module level.

Confirmation of the configuration parameters

(See Confirming the configuration of a module.,

p. 60 )

Global confirmation of the application (See Globally reconfiguring an

application., p. 61 )

Confirmation at application level.

Symbolization

Programming

Transfer

Documentation

Symbolization of the variables associated with the slave devices.

Programming of the functions carried out via the AS-i bus.

Transfer of the application onto the PLC.

Printing of the different information relating to the application.

116

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Mode

Connected

AS-i Bus

Phase

Debugging

Description

Debugging the application using: l debug help screens allowing you to view the slave connections, their parameters, etc.

l diagnostic screens allowing you to identify errors.

Note: The order defined above is given for information purposes. The PL7 software allows you to use the editors interactively in the required order. (However, you cannot use the data editor or the program editor without having first configured the module and the slave devices.)

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

117

AS-i Bus

Architecture of the TSX SAZ 10 module

At a Glance The TSX SAZ 10 module operates in master/slave mode. The master controls only the exchanges on the bus.

The AS-i standard defines several levels of service offered by the master: l Profile M0 - Minimum Master: the master only offers the configuration of the l slaves connected on the bus on power up and only input/output exchanges.

Profile M1 - Full Master: this profile covers all the functionality defined by the ASi standard, l Profile M2 - Reduced Master: this profile matches the functionality of profile M0 with the option of parameterizing the slaves.

Note: The TSX SAZ 10 module matches the M2 profile with the additional option of reading diagnostic information from the slaves.

The module includes data fields that allow you to manage the lists of slaves and the images of input / output data. This information is stored in volatile memory.

Illustration of the architecture

The figure below shows the architecture of the TSX SAZ 10 module.

TSX SAZ 10

Data images

I/O data

2 Current parameters

Configuration / Identification of

AS-i bus

AS-i bus

LDS

LAS

TSX 37

Non-volatile memory

Reference configuration

Reference parameters

LPS

118

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Description of the constituent elements

AS-i Bus

The table below shows the different elements making up the architecture of the TSX

SAZ 10 module.

Number

Element

I/O data

Current parameters

Configuration/

Identification

Description

Images of the 124 inputs and 124 outputs of the AS-i

Bus.

Image of the parameters of all the slaves.

This field contains all the I/O codes and the identification codes for all the slaves detected.

LDS

LAS

List of all slaves detected on the bus.

List of slaves activated on the bus.

Reference configuration Module reference configuration.

Reference parameters Parameters saved via PL7 or resulting from a backup.

LPS List of slaves provided on the bus and configured via

PL7.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

119

AS-i Bus

Structure of an AS-i slave

At a Glance

Structure illustration

The AS-i bus is used to interconnect 31 slave devices, each one having: l l l

4 input bits,

4 output bits,

4 parametering bits,

Thus the AS-i bus can manage a maximum number of 248 I/O.

Each slave has its own address and a profile (defines variables exchange).

The figure below shows the structure of an AS-i slave.

AS-i slave

1 I/O data

2 Parameters

Configuration/

Identification

AS-i bus

4 Address

Description of constituent elements

Number

The table below shows the different elements that make up the structure of an AS-i slave.

Element Description

Input/output data Input data is stored by the slave and made available for the AS-i master.

Output data is updated by the master module.

Parameters The parameters are used to control and switch internal operating modes to the sensor or the actuator.

Configuration/

Identification

Address

This field contains: l l the code which corresponds to I/O configuration, the slave identification (ID) code.

Physical address of slave.

Note : The operating parameters, address, configuration and identification data are saved in a non-volatile memory.

120

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i Bus

How to declare an AS-i communication module in the PLC rack

Procedure This operation is used to declare an AS-i communication module in the PLC TSX 37 rack using software.

Step

Action

Double click on slot 4 of the base rack.

Result : The dialog box Add module appears:

Add module

Family:

Analog

Communication

Upcounting

Simulation

Alternating

1.5

1.0

1.5

Module:

TSX SAZ 10

TSX STZ 10

MODULE AS-Interface

MODULE XL7 - TSX 37l

Cancel

C o m p t a g e

A n a

Select Communication in the Family field.

Select the reference of the module in the Module field.

Confirm the selection with OK .

Result : The module is declared in its slot; the latter is grayed out and contains the module reference.

TSX

3722

SAZ

Note : Only one TSX SAZ 10 communication module can be installed in a

TSX 37 configuration.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

121

AS-i Bus

How to access the AS-i Bus configuration

Procedure This operation is used to access the configuration of the AS-i Bus communication module.

Step

Action

Access the Hardware configuration screen

Result : The rack hardware configuration screen appears.

C o m p t a g e

A n a

TSX

3722

SAZ

2 Double click on the position of the communication module or select the module and execute the command Service

→

Open module .

Result : The hardware configuration screen for the module selected appears.

TSX SAZ 10 [POSITION 04]

Configuration

Designation: AS-Interface

CHANNEL 0:

Channel 0

AS-interface BUS

AS-interface configuration

MAST

General

Automatic Addressing

Configuration of slave

Profile

Comment

Input Symbol

Output

Symbol

Fallback mode on failure

Maintain Fallback to 0

Parameters

122

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i bus configuration

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This Chapter describes the Configuration aspect for installing the AS-i bus.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Description of the configuration screen for an AS-i communication module

How to define a slave device on the AS-i bus

How to modify the software configuration of the AS-i Bus

How to access the description of an AS-i slave

How to define a new slave profile in the standard AS-I catalogue

How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Automatic addressing

How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Fallback mode

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

123

AS-i bus configuration

Description of the configuration screen for an AS-i communication module

At a Glance

Illustration

The configuration screen of the AS-i module gives access to the parameters associated with the module and the slave devices.

This screen allows display and modification of parameters in local mode, and also debugging in connected mode.

TSX SAZ 10 [POSITION 04]

Configuration

Designation: AS-Interface MODULE

CHANNEL 0:

Channel 0

AS-interface BUS

AS-interface configuration

MAST

General parameters

Automatic Addressing

Configuration of slave 1:

Profile

Comment

Input Symbol

Output

Symbol

Fallback mode on failure

Maintain Fallback to 0

Parameters

Description The table below shows the different elements of the configuration screen and their functions.

Number Element

1 Title bar

2 Command zone

Function

Indicates the reference of the selected module and its physical position in the rack.

Allows the selection of the parameter type: l l

Configuration

Debugging

(diagnostic), only accessible in connected mode.

Displays the designation of the selected module.

The display of this zone is optional. The selection is made by using the command

View

→

Module zone .

124

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i bus configuration

Number

Element

Channel zone

AS-i configuration zone

General parameters zone

Slave configuration zone

Function

Allows selection of the task in which the information coming from the AS-i communication channel will be scanned: l l

MAST

FAST

task,

task.

The display of this zone is optional. The selection is made by using the command

View

→

Channel zone .

Allows: l l viewing of the slave devices connected to the bus, definition of a new configuration (adding, modifying or deleting slave devices).

Allows the viewing and selection of general parameters applied to all the slaves on the bus.

l l

Automatic addressing,

Fallback mode.

Allows viewing of the data associated with the selected slave, such as: l l l l its profile, a comment, its AS-i symbol (the symbols are defined using the variables editor), its parameters.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

125

AS-i bus configuration

How to define a slave device on the AS-i bus

At a Glance The PL7 software offers a catalogue, which regroups all of the AS-i slaves that are available. This catalogue is structured in families (e.g.: Inductive detectors).

The list of slave device families contains two distinct elements: l l

Non-specialized products,

Private family.

Selection of a non-specialized product allows the selection of an AS-i profile amongst 240 possibilities.

Selecting Private family gives the user the possibility of managing a specific AS-i device catalogue file via its programming terminal.

Note: An application using the AS-i products from the Private Family catalogue is always linked to the usage of this same private family catalogue.

Procedure This operation supports the declaration of a slave device on the AS-i bus.

Step

Action

Access the AS-i module’s hardware configuration screen.

In the field AS-interface configuration , double click in the cell corresponding to the new slave’s (1 to 31) host slot number or select the said cell and then carry out the Edit

→

Add a slave command.

Result : The screen Associate a profile appears.

Associate Profile

AS-interface profile families

Code AS-i family name

Capacitive detectors

Inductive proximity sensors

Photo-electric detectors

Private family

IP20 connection interface

AS-interface profile catalog

AS-i Name Comment

View

Add

Modify

Details

Ok Cancel

126

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Step

AS-i bus configuration

Action

In the Family Name field select the required family.

Result : The Profile catalogue associated with the selected family appears.

AS-interface profile families

AS-i AS-i family name

Control station

Détecteurs capacitifs

Photo-electric detectors

Interface E/S

Détecteurs inductifs

Associate a profiile

AS-i -Catalog : Photo-electric detectors

1.1

Nom

XUJ-K063539AS

1.1

XUJ-K103534AS

1.1

XUJ-K123538AS

1.1

XUJ-K703538AS

1.1

XUJ-ZAS1

Commentaire

Photo elect. detect. reflex

Photo elect. detect. Thru beam

Photo elect. detect bs 1.2m

Photo elect. detect bs 0.7m

Back over for XUJ detectors

Ok Cancel

View

Add

Modify

Détails

In the Profile catalogue select the required device.

Confirm the selection with OK .

Result : The slave device is defined in its slot, the reference of the connected device appears opposite the number of the slave.

AS-interface configuration

P XUJ-K1233538AS

6 To connect other slave devices to the AS-i bus, repeat the procedure from step

127

AS-i bus configuration

How to modify the software configuration of the AS-i Bus

At a Glance

Procedure for deleting a slave

The PL7 software offers, from the configuration screen of the AS-i module, a set of functions which allow you to easily modify, in local mode, the software configuration of the AS-i Bus.

This operation is used to delete a slave declared on the AS-i Bus.

Step

Action

Select the slave to be deleted.

Select the command Edit

→

Delete AS-i slave .

Procedure for moving a slave

This operation is used to move a slave declared on the AS-i Bus.

Step

Action

Select the slave to be moved.

Select the command Edit

→

Modify AS-i slave address .

Result: The following dialog box appears.

Modify address

Current address:

Addresses available:

Cancel

Select the new address.

Confirm using OK .

128

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i bus configuration

How to access the description of an AS-i slave

At a Glance

Definition of a profile

Details of a profile

The PL7 software allows access to all the information relating to an AS-i device such as: l l the definition of a profile, the details of a profile.

l l l l l

A profile is defined by: its name, a comment (optional), identifiers (IO, ID), a number of inputs and/or outputs, operation parameters.

The Detail function allows access, for a given slave, to all the information presented in the catalog file.

Profile Details r4e_01

Reference:

User module active

Supplier:

AS- profilei:

I/O Error:

INPUTS:

XZ-SDA10D2

Enable the connection of 4 sensors.

PNP type input.

Maximum current used by 4 sensors = 100mA

Version:

Télémécanique

0.0

PNP type

D0: I-1 Sensor signal 1 (pins 4-2)

D1: I-2 Sensor signal 2 (pins 4-2)

D2: I-3 Sensor signal 3 (pins 4-2)

Procedure for accessing information on a profile

The following table shows the procedure for displaying the characteristics of a slave device.

Step Action

1 Access the AS-i module’s hardware configuration screen.

Double click on the required slave.

Result:: The window Associate a profile displays and highlights the device in question

Click on the button: l l

View to access definition information,

Detail to access all the information.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

129

AS-i bus configuration

How to define a new slave profile in the standard AS-I catalogue

At a Glance The PL7 software offers the possibility to define a slave profile, which was not provided, in the standard catalogue.

The new profile, defined in this way, is added to the catalogue in Private family .

This profile can then be used as a standard catalogue profile.

Note: A profile cannot be deleted, only their name and comment can be changed.

Procedure The following table presents the procedure for defining a slave profile, which is not provided in the standard catalogue.

Step

Action

Access the AS-i module’s hardware configuration screen.

Double click in a slave’s host cell (1 to 31).

Result : The screen Associate a profile appears.

Select Private family in the field Family name .

Result : The Profile catalog linked to the selected family appears.

Associate Profile

AS-interface profile families

Code AS-i family name

Capacitive detectors

Inductive proximity sensors

Photo-electric detectors

Private family

IP20 connection interface

AS-interface profile catalog

A.4

AS-i Name

Sensor 1I 4Q

Comment

View

Add

Modify

Details

Ok Cancel

Click on the button Add .

Enter: l l the name of the new profile, a comment (optional).

130

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Step

AS-i bus configuration

Action

Select: l l the the

code (corresponds to the input/output configuration),

code (identifier).

For each parameter define: l l the system’s acknowledgement (box checked), a label (optional).

Confirm the introduction of a new profile using Confirm .

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

131

AS-i bus configuration

How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Automatic addressing

At a Glance Each slave on the AS-i bus must be assigned (via configuration) a unique physical address. This must be the same as the one declared in PL7.

PL7 software offers an automatic slave addressing utility so that an AS-i console does not have to be used.

The automatic addressing utility, which can be accessed via PL7, is used for: l l replacing a faulty slave (See

p. 145),

inserting a new slave (See How to insert a slave device into an existing AS-i

configuration., p. 146).

Automatic replacement of a faulty AS-i slave,

Note: A new configuration with automatic addressing will not be accepted if one or more slaves with a 0 address are on the bus. In this case, the Configuration refused by module message appears.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for setting the Automatic addressing parameter.

Step

Action

Access the AS-i communication module’s configuration screen.

Click on the Automatic addressing check box found in the General parameters zone.

Result : The Automatic addressing utility will be activated (box checked) or disabled (box not checked).

General parameters

Automatic addressing

Fallback mode on failure

Fallback: Maintain

Note : By default, the Automatic addressing parameter has been selected in the configuration screen.

132

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i bus configuration

How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Fallback mode

At a Glance This parameter sets the fallback mode which slave outputs take on while switching to STOP mode or if there is a PLC fault.

Possible modes are: l Fallback to 0 : AS-i slave outputs which are present on the bus are set to 0 (%Q l objects are not modified),

Maintain state : AS-i slave outputs remain in the state they were before STOP mode was engaged.

Note: The fallback mode for slaves which do not have a watchdog (AS-i bus monitoring function) is not guaranteed in case of an AS-i bus fault, or AS-i power supply failure. For slaves with a watchdog, the fallback position is preset within the device.

Procedure The table below shows the procedure for setting the Fallback mode assigned to slave device outputs.

Step

Action

Access the AS-i communication module’s configuration screen.

Click on the Fallback to 0 / Maintain state check-box found in the General parameters zone, in the Fallback mode on fault field.

Result : The fallback mode selected will therefore be assigned to the slave device.

General parameters

Automatic addressing

Fallback mode on failure

Fallback: Maintain

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

133

AS-i bus configuration

134

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging the AS-i bus

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This Chapter describes the Debug aspect of the AS-i bus.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introduction to the Debug function

Description of the debug screen for an AS-i module

How to access functionality in the module diagnostics and channel diagnostics for an AS-i device

Page

136

137

139

Displaying the slaves’ status

How to access adjustment of an AS-i device’s parameters

How to access the AS-i channels’ forcing/unforcing function

How to access the SET and RESET commands of the AS-i channels

Automatic replacement of a faulty AS-i slave

How to insert a slave device into an existing AS-i configuration.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

135

Debugging the AS-i bus

Introduction to the Debug function

At a Glance The Debug function is used for each AS-i communication module present in the application: l l to display the slave state (connection, parameters etc.), to access the adjustment function for the selected channel (channel forcing etc.).

The function also accesses module diagnostics in the event of a fault.

Note: This function is only available in online mode.

136

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging the AS-i bus

Description of the debug screen for an AS-i module

At a Glance

Illustration

The debug screen dynamically displays the status of the AS-i module and the devices connected on the bus.

It is also used to access slave parameter adjustment and channel commands

(forcing the value of an input or output, Set/Reset of an output, etc.).

The debug screen looks like this:

1 TSX SAZ 10 [POSITION 04]

Debugging

Designation: AS-Interface MODULE Version: 1.0

Channel 0: ASi

Channel 0

AS-interface BUS

AS-interface configuration

1 P

2 P

10 P

XZ-SDA22D32

XAL-S2003

LF2K09BW#**C

XZ-SDA22D32

COM RUN ERR IO

MAST

Slave no.: 1

Profile

Projected: 3.0

Detected: 3.0

Channel

ASi Symbol

Not handled

DIAG...

Status

Parameters (3-0)

Value: 1111

Modif PARAM

Global unforcing

Channel action

F4 Force to 0

F5 Force to 1

Unforce

Set

F8 Reset

Description

Number Element

1 Title bar

Module zone

The table below shows the different elements of the debug screen and their functions.

Channel zone

Function

Indicates the reference of the module selected and its physical position in the

PLC.

Allows the selection of the parameter type: l l

Configuration

Debugging

(diagnostic), only accessible in connected mode.

Displays the status of the module lights COM , RUN , ERR , I/O .

Provides direct access to the module diagnostics when a module is faulty

(signaled by the light integrated in the diagnostics access button DIAG , which turns red).

Provides direct access to the channel diagnostics when a channel is faulty

(signaled by the light integrated in the diagnostics access button DIAG , which turns red).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

137

Debugging the AS-i bus

Number Element

AS-i configuration zone

Slave zone

Function

Displays the slave devices connected to the bus.

Displays the status of the slave channels and gives access to the debug functions.

138

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging the AS-i bus

How to access functionality in the module diagnostics and channel diagnostics for an AS-i device

At a Glance

Procedure for accessing the module diagnostics

The functions of the module or channel diagnostics display the current errors in which are classed according to their category: l internal errors (internal software errors, communication error with the processor, configuration, parametering or command error), l l external errors(slave device failed, AS-i supply switched off, terminal error, difference between physical configuration and PL7 configuration), other errors (module absent or switched off).

A faulty module becomes apparent when certain lights change to red, such as: l in the configuration editor at rack level: l the module position light, l in the configuration editor at module level: l the lights RUN , ERR and I/O , l the light DIAG .

A faulty channel becomes apparent when certain lights change to red, such as: l in the configuration editor at rack level: l l the module position light, in the configuration editor at channel level: l the light DIAG .

The following table presents the procedure to access the screen Module diagnostics .

Step

Action

Access the AS-i module’s hardware configuration screen.

Click on the button DIAG situated in the module zone.

Result : The list of module errors appears.

Internal faults

Module Diagnostics

External faults Other faults

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

139

Debugging the AS-i bus

Procedure for accessing the channel diagnostics

The following table presents the procedure for accessing the screen Channel diagnostics .

Step

Action

Access the AS-i module’s hardware configuration screen.

Click on the button DIAG situated in the channel zone.

Result : The list of channel errors appears.

Internal faults

Channel Diagnostics

External faults

Device error

Other faults

Configuration error

140

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging the AS-i bus

Displaying the slaves’ status

At a Glance The lower part of the communication module’s debugging screen is reserved for diagnostics of the AS-i bus.

The slave devices connected to the bus are displayed in the AS-i Configuration zone. On each side of the slave number, two different icons are displayed, indicating that the slave was specified or detected.

Displaying slave status

Case

For each slave device, one of the following four cases can occur:

Illustration

Slave status:

AS-interface configuration

D 1

P XAL-S2003

Slave status:

AS-interface configuration

D 1

P XAL-S2003

Slave status:

AS-interface configuration

P XAL-S2003

Slave status:

AS-interface configuration

XAL-S2003 D 1

Explanation

The slave P specified in configuration and the detected slave D are identical.

The slave P specified in configuration and the detected slave D are not identical. The slave is declared faulty (1).

A slave P is specified at configuration but no slave is detected.

The slave is declared faulty (1).

An additional slave, not specified at configuration, is connected to the bus. The slave is declared faulty (1).

Key :

(1) When a slave is faulty, the icons situated beside the number as well as the button DIAG turn to red.

Note : The Profile field in the Slave zone of the debugging screen allows you to check if the profiles of the specified

( Projected ) slave and the Detected slave are really identical.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

141

Debugging the AS-i bus

How to access adjustment of an AS-i device’s parameters

At a Glance

Procedure

The debugging screen of an AS-i module allows, amongst other things, access to modification of a slave’s parameters.

The following table shows the procedure for modifying the parameters of a slave device declared faulty.

Step Action

1 Access the AS-i module’s debugging screen.

2 Select the slave with the error.

Result : In the slave zone of the debugging screen, it is possible to read all the information relating to the selected slave.

AS-interface configuration

1 P

2 P

XZ-SDA22D32

XAL-S2003

Slave no : 1

Profile

Projected

Detected

3.0

LF2K09BW#**C

XZ-SDA22D32

Chan.

Asi Symbol

Not handled

Parameters (3-0)

Value : 1111

Modify PARAM

State

Global unforcing

Chan. action

F4 Force to 0

Force to 1

Unforce

Set

Reset

3 Click on the button Modif PARAM situated in the slave zone’s Parameters field.

Result : The window Parameter modification appears.

TSX SAY 100 [RACK 0 POSITION 8]

Modify Parameters slave no : 1

Mise au point

Parameters

Désignation : COUPLEUR AS-Interface Version :

0 Unused 2

Voie 0 : Asi

Unused

Voie 0

BUS As-Interface

Send

Cancel entry

AS-interface configuration

XZ-SDA22D32

XAL-S2003

1 P

2 P

Slave no : 1

Profile

Projected:

Unused

RUN

Flash On/Off

Detected: 3.0

Chan.

3.0

MAST

AS-i Symbol

ERR IO

Parameters (3-0)

Value : 1111

Modif PARAM

State

DIAG...

Global unforcing

Chan. action

4 Modify the required parameters.

5 Click on Send to recognize the new values.

142

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging the AS-i bus

How to access the AS-i channels’ forcing/unforcing function

Introduction This function supports the modification of the state of the channels, which are linked to the AS-i slave.

The different commands, which are available are: l for a channel: l l forcing to 0, l forcing to 1, l unforcing.

for all the channels (when at least one channel is forced): l global unforcing.

Procedure The following table shows the procedure to follow to force or unforce the channels linked to an AS-i slave.

Step Action for a channel

1 Access the AS-i interface card’s debugging screen.

2 Select a slave in the zone AS-i Configuration .

3 Select the channel to modify in the slave zone table.

Result : It is possible to modify the channel using the buttons situated in the field Channel action .

Slave no : 1

Profile

Projected 3.0

Parameters (3-0)

Value : 1111

Modify PARAM

Detected

3.0

Global unforcing

Chan.

Asi Symbol

Not handled

State

Chan. action

F4 Force to 0

Force to 1

Unforce

Set

Reset

Action for a group of channels

Click on the button Global unforcing found in the slave zone.

4 Select the required function (buttons Force to 0 or Force to 1 in the field Channel Action .

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

143

Debugging the AS-i bus

How to access the SET and RESET commands of the AS-i channels

At a Glance

Procedure

These commands allow the assignment of the values 0 (RESET) or 1 (SET) to the channels of an AS-i slave.

The status of the output affected by one of these commands is temporary and can be modified at any time by the application.

The following table presents the procedure for assigning a value of 0 or 1 to the selected AS-i slave’s channels.

Step

Action

Access the AS-i module’s debugging screen.

Select a slave in the zone AS-i Configuration .

Select the channel to be modified in the Slave zone table.

Result : It is possible to modify the channel using the buttons situated in the field Channel action .

Slave no : 1

Profile

Projected 3.0

Detected

Chan.

3.0

Asi Symbol

Not handled

Parameters (3-0)

Value : 1111

Modify PARAM

State

Global unforcing

Chan. action

F4 Force to 0

Force to 1

Unforce

Set

Reset

4 Select the required function (buttons Set or Reset ) in the field Channel action .

144

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging the AS-i bus

Automatic replacement of a faulty AS-i slave

Principle When a slave has been declared faulty, it can be automatically replaced with a slave of the same type.

This happens without the AS-i bus having to stop, and without any particular manipulation since the configuration mode Automatic addressing utility is active

(see

How to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Automatic addressing, p. 132).

Two options are available: l The replacement slave is programmed with the same address using the pocket programmer, and has the same profile as the faulty slave. It will then be automatically inserted into the list of detected slaves (LDS) and list of active slaves (LAS).

l the replacement slave is blank (address 0, new slave) and has the same profile as the faulty slave. It will automatically assume the address of the replaced slave, and will then be inserted into the list of detected slaves (LDS) and the list of active slaves (LAS).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

145

Debugging the AS-i bus

How to insert a slave device into an existing AS-i configuration.

At a Glance

Procedure

It is possible to insert a device into an existing AS-i configuration without having to use the pocket programmer.

This operation is possible as soon as: l the service Automatic addressing of the configuration mode is active (See How

to modify AS-i slave general parameters: Automatic addressing, p. 132),

l l l l a single slave is absent in the physical configuration, the slave which is to be inserted is projected in the PL7 configuration, the slave has the profile expected by the configuration, the slave has the address 0.

Therefore the AS-i interface card will automatically assign to the slave the value predefined in the configuration.

The following table presents the procedure for making the automatic insertion of a new slave effective.

Step

Action

Add the new slave in the configuration screen in local mode.

Do a configuration transfer to the PLC in connected mode.

Physically link the new slave with address 0 to the AS-i bus.

Note: It is possible to modify an application by carrying out the above manipulation as many times as necessary.

146

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This Chapter introduces the different word and bit objects associated with the AS-i function, as well as how to address them.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

12.1

12.2

Topic

Addressing objects associated with the AS-i function

Language objects associated with the AS-i function

Page

148

149

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

147

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

12.1 Addressing objects associated with the AS-i function

Addressing language objects associated with slave devices connected on the

AS-i Bus

At a Glance

Illustration

The addressing of bit and word objects associated with application specific tasks is defined in the part entitled Shared applications.

This page introduces the specific features linked to the AS-i function.

Reminder of the principles of addressing:

% I or Q

Symbol Type of object

\ 4.0

TSX SAZ 10 channel/ module address

\ n i

Number of slavesPosition of bit

Specific values The table below gives the values specific to the AS-i slave objects.

Element n

Values

0 to 31

0 to 3

Comment

Slot 0 cannot be configured.

148

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

12.2

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

Language objects associated with the AS-i function

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section

What's in this

Section?

This Section introduces the different language objects associated with the AS-i function.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Implicit exchange objects associated with the AS-i function

Managing exchanges: Module %MW4.MOD.0:Xj or channel %MW4.0.0:Xj exchanges in progress

Managing exchanges: Module %MW4.MOD.1:Xj or channel %MW4.0.1:Xj report

Explicit exchange objects: General

Explicit exchange objects: Channel status %MW4.0.2:Xj to %MW4.0.22:Xj

Explicit exchange object: Channel command %MW4.0.23:Xj

Explicit exchange objects: Adjustment parameters %MW4.0.24 to

%MW4.0.39

Explicit exchange objects: Status %MW4.MOD.2:Xj

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

149

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

Implicit exchange objects associated with the AS-i function

At a Glance

Bit objects

Address

%I4.0.ERR

%I4.MOD.ERR

%I4.0

%I4.0.i

%I\4.0\.n.i

%Q\4.0\.n.i

%Q4.0

%Q4.0.i

These are the objects whose exchanges are carried out automatically on each cycle of the task in which the AS-i function is configured.

The table below shows the different implicit exchange bit objects.

Function

Channel error bit

Module error bit

Input validation

Reserved input channel bit output channel bit

Reserved

Meaning when the bit is set to 1

Indicates a supply fault or a slave missing on the AS-i bus.

Indicates the module is faulty.

Indicates that all inputs are valid.

Note: When this bit is set to 0, it indicates that at least one input is not valid: offline mode or channel error.

Indicates that the input channel i of the device n is activated.

Indicates that the output channel i of the device n is activated.

Word objects

Address

%IW4.0

%IW4.0.1

%IW4.0.2

%IW4.0.3

The table below shows the different implicit exchange word objects.

Function

List of slaves in error

List of activated slaves (LAS)

Meaning when Xj = 1 (j = position of the bit in the word) j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 0 to 15 in error or missing.

j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 16 to 31 in error or missing.

j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 0 to 15 activated.

j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 16 to 31 activated.

150

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

Managing exchanges: Module %MW4.MOD.0:Xj or channel %MW4.0.0:Xj exchanges in progress

At a Glance

Description

These word type objects carry information about the module or channel exchanges in progress.

They are updated automatically by the system.

The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word %MW4.MOD.0

Address

%MW4.MOD.0:X0

%MW4.MOD.0:X1

Meaning when Xj = 1

Exchange of status words in progress on the module channel.

Exchange of command words in progress on the module channel.

Description

Example

The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word %MW4.0.0

Address

%MW4.0.0:X0

%MW4.0.0:X1

Meaning when Xj = 1

Exchange of status words in progress on the AS-i channel.

Exchange of command words in progress on the AS-i channel.

The example below shows a possible use for this type of word.

(* Request for update of the status words of channel 0 *)

(* of the AS-i module if no exchange is in progress on this channel*)

IF NOT %MW4.0:X0 THEN READ_STS %CH4.0;

END_IF;

Note: When the period of the explicit exchange is shorter than the cycle time of the

PLC task, the bit %MW4.0:X0 never changes to 1.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

151

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

Managing exchanges: Module %MW4.MOD.1:Xj or channel %MW4.0.1:Xj report

At a Glance

Description

These word type objects contain information on the module or channel exchange reports.

They are updated automatically by the system.

The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word %MW4.MOD.1

Address

%MW4.MOD.1:X0

%MW4.MOD.1:X1

Meaning when Xj = 1

Status parameter exchange error on channel 0 of the module.

Command parameter exchange error on channel 0 of the module.

Description The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word %MW4.0.1

Address

%MW4.0.1:X0

%MW4.0.1:X1

Meaning when Xj = 1

Status parameter exchange error on AS-i channel.

Command parameter exchange error on AS-i channel.

Example The example below shows a possible use for this type of word.

(* Detection of a status error on the module *)

(* situated in slot 4 *)

IF NOT %MW4.MOD.0:X0 THEN READ_STS %CH4.MOD;

END_IF;

IF %MW4.MOD.1:X0 THEN SET %M100;

END_IF;

152

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

Explicit exchange objects: General

At a Glance Explicit exchange objects carry information (e.g.: bus operation, slave status, etc.) and additional commands to carry out advanced programming of the AS-i function.

Note: The configuration constants %KW4.0.r, not documented in this manual, can only be accessed in read mode and correspond to the configuration parameters entered using the Configuration editor.

l l l l l l

Explicit exchange objects are exchanged at the request of the user program using the instructions:

READ_STS (read status words)

WRITE_CMD (write command words),

WRITE_PARAM

READ_PARAM

SAVE_PARAM

(write adjustment parameters),

(read adjustment parameters),

(save adjustment parameters),

RESTORE_PARAM (restore adjustment parameters).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

153

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

Explicit exchange objects: Channel status %MW4.0.2:Xj to %MW4.0.22:Xj

At a Glance These word type objects provide information on all the slaves present on the AS-i

Bus.

Description of the word

%MW4.0.2

Address

%MW4.0.2:X0

%MW4.0.2:X1

%MW4.0.2:X2

%MW4.0.2:X3

%MW4.0.2:X4

%MW4.0.2:X5

%MW4.0.2:X6

%MW4.0.2:X7

The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word

Function

Standard status

%MW4.0.2

Meaning when Xj = 1

Reserved

One or several slaves in error.

Line error (supply switched off or terminal block error).

Physical configuration different to the PL7 configuration.

Internal software error.

Reserved

Error communicating with the processor.

Parametering or command configuration error.

Description of the word

%MW4.0.3

Address

%MW4.0.3:X0

%MW4.0.3:X1

%MW4.0.3:X2

%MW4.0.3:X3

%MW4.0.3:X4

%MW4.0.3:X5

%MW4.0.3:X6

%MW4.0.3:X7

%MW4.0.3:X8

The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word

Function

AS-i specific status

Meaning when Xj = 1

Correct configuration.

Slave 0 present.

Automatic addressing active.

Reserved.

AS-i supply failed.

Offline phase active.

Reserved.

%MW4.0.3

154

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

Description of the words

%MW4.0.4 and

%MW4.0.5

Address

%MW4.0.4:Xj

%MW4.0.5:Xj

The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the words

%MW4.0.5

Function Meaning when Xj = 1

List of detected slaves LDS j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 0 to 15 detected.

j = 0 to 15 -> respectively slave 16 to 31 detected.

%MW4.0.4

and

Description of the words

%MW4.0.6 to

%MW4.0.21

Address

%MW4.0.6 to

%MW4.0.21

The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the words

%MW4.0.21

%MW4.0.6

Function

I/O and ID configuration for all detected slaves

Meaning

Words 6 to 21 -> respectively devices 0-1, 2-3, ..., 28-29, 30-31.

The least significant bytes relate to the slaves with an even address.

The most significant bytes relate to the slaves with an odd address.

For each byte: bit 0-3 = configuration code for input/output (I/O) channels, bit 4-7 = identification code (ID).

Description of the word

%MW4.0.22

Address

%MW4.0.22

The table below gives the meaning of the word

Function

Parametering data of last slave parameterized.

%MW4.0.22

Meaning

Contains the reply (value of the parameters sent) from the last slave parameterized. This allows you to verify via PL7 that the slave has received them correctly.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

155

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

Explicit exchange object: Channel command %MW4.0.23:Xj

At a Glance

Description

This type of object word is used to manage the AS-i master’s change to Offline mode

(See

AS-i offline operating mode, p. 164).

The table below shows the coding of the bits 0 and 1 for the word %MW4.0.23

which gives access to Offline mode.

Bit 1

Bit 0

Function

Normal operating mode

Activation of offline mode

Deactivation of offline mode

No change

156

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

Explicit exchange objects: Adjustment parameters %MW4.0.24 to %MW4.0.39

At a Glance These objects are used to manage the parameters of the AS-i slave devices.

They can be modified without stopping the AS-i function.

Description The table below shows the adjustment objects for the AS-i channel.

Address Function Meaning

%MW4.0.24 to

%MW4.0.39

Adjustment of parameters Contains respectively the value of the parameters for the slaves 1 to

31.

Least significant byte: parameters for slaves with an even address,

Most significant byte: parameters for slaves with an odd address.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

157

Bits and words associated with the AS-i function

Explicit exchange objects: Status %MW4.MOD.2:Xj

At a Glance

Description

This word type object contains information about the status of the module.

The table below gives the meaning of the different bits of the word

%MW4.MOD.2:Xj .

Address

%MW4.MOD.2:X0

%MW4.MOD.2:X1

%MW4.MOD.2:X2

%MW4.MOD.2:X3

%MW4.MOD.2:X4

%MW4.MOD.2:X5

%MW4.MOD.2:X6

%MW4.MOD.2:X7

Function

Standard module status

Meaning when Xj = 1

Internal error.

Configuration error.

Line fault.

Not used.

Module missing.

Not used.

158

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i operating mode

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This Chapter introduces the different AS-i function operating modes.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

AS-i operating mode: General

AS-i protected mode

AS-i wiring test mode

AS-i offline operating mode

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

159

AS-i operation

AS-i operating mode: General

At a Glance

Operating mode

The AS-i function allows three operating modes, each of which responds to l l particular needs. These modes are: protected mode, wiring test mode (which can be accessed using the adjustment terminal FTX 117

Adjust), l offline mode.

The diagram below shows the general function diagram of how the AS-i Bus operates.

Offline mode

Wiring test

Start of

AS-i master module

No Is the master configured?

Yes

Protected mode

Automatic control

of AS-i Bus

160

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i operation

Relationship between the PLC and AS-i Bus operating modes

The table below shows the relationship between the PLC TSX 37 operating modes and those of the AS-i bus.

PLC

Configured mode (1)

AS-i Bus

Protected mode

Non configured mode (1) Wiring test mode (Configuration mode)

Key:

(1) These PLC concepts (configured, non configured) relate to the declaration of the module and the slave devices in the hardware configuration screen in the PL7 application.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

161

AS-i operation

AS-i protected mode

At a Glance The AS-i protected operating mode is the mode generally used for an application which is running.

It is assumed that the TSX SAY 100 module is configured in PL7.

This: l continually checks that the list of detected slaves is the same as the list of expected slaves.

l monitors the power supply.

In this mode, a slave will only be activated if it has been declared in the configuration and been detected.

Principle of activating a slave

The schema below show the principle of activating AS-i slaves.

PL7 AS-i Module

List of slaves expected LPS

List of slaves detected LDS

Comparison

List of slaves activated LAS

162

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i operation

AS-i wiring test mode

At a Glance AS-i wiring test mode is used to access the input/output bits of slaves connected to the bus.

Note: The LDS and LAS lists, as well as the adjustment parameters, cannot be accessed.

The wiring test requires the adjustment terminal FTX 117 Adjust to be used.

Note: When accessing slave I/O objects using the FTX 117 Adjust terminal, personnel safety must be maintained while activating accessible objects, in particular slave outputs.

Access conditions

Procedure

This mode can be accessed when the PLC is in a "non-configured" state. This means when: l the PLC does not have an application, or l the AS-i module has not been configured.

The table below describes the procedure for accessing and exiting Wiring test mode from the adjustment terminal.

Step

Action

Set bit %S8 to 0

Set bit %S74 to 1

Set bit %S73 to 1

Comment

Enables wiring test mode.

Saves, if necessary, the current module configuration.

Activates the module in protected mode.

Access I/O via the %I fields for inputs and %Q fields for outputs.

Reset bit %S74 to 0 This bit should normally be set to 0.

Set bit %S8 to 1 Disables wiring test mode

Note: In this mode, all slaves must have a different address to avoid conflict when replying to the module.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

163

AS-i operation

AS-i offline operating mode

At a Glance AS-i offline mode is an advanced operating mode, which can be used for debugging or maintenance.

Note: Its use requires good knowledge of AS-i communication.

Principles

Procedure

When the module is put into offline mode, it first resets all the slaves present to zero and stops exchanges on the bus.

During offline mode, the I/O images in the module are frozen in the state in which they were at the time of the change to the mode.

When the module exits, if the list of slaves present (LPS) equals the list of slaves detected (LDS), the system restarts. If this is not the case, a fault is generated, and it then necessary to transfer to diagnostic or configuration mode.

Offline operating mode can be accessed either: l from the PL7 software application by acting on the 0 and 1 bits of the word

%MW4.0.23, l automatically on detecting an AS-i supply fault.

Reminder: Bit 7 of the word %MW4.0.3 set to 1 indicates that the AS-i Bus is in offline mode.

164

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i performance

AS-i bus performance

At a Glance

AS-i scanning time

AS-i response time

Example

The AS-i bus is independently managed by the master. This exchanges data on each cycle with each slave device configured on the bus (in ascending order of slave address number).

t scanning time represents the exchange time between the master and n slaves (31 maximum).

Either: l l t = 156 micro seconds x (n+2), if n < 31, t = 156 micro seconds x (n+1), if n = 31.

Thus the scanning time cannot exceed 5 ms.

T response time represents the AS-i cycle time.

l l l

This includes: the bus scanning time, the update of the AS-I module internal memory, the PLC cycle.

The table below shows three examples of T response time for a PLC task lasting 10 ms, 30 ms, and 60 ms.

This T time is for a bus loaded with 31 slaves operating normally with no link faults.

PLC task

10 ms

30 ms

60 ms

Typical response time

35 ms

65 ms

110 ms

Maximum response time

56 ms

96 ms

156 ms

165

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AS-i performance

166

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog application

At a Glance

Aim of this part

What's in this part?

This part introduces the application-specific analog function on Micro PLCs and describes its implementation using PL7 software.

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter

Chaptername

The analog application

Built-in analog interface

Analog input modules TSX AEZ 801 / TSX AEZ 802

Analog input modules TSX AEZ 414

Analog output module TSX ASZ 401

Analog output module TSX ASZ 200

TSX AMZ 600 Analog Module

Configuring the analog application

Configuration of analog channels

Debugging function

Bits and words associated with the analog application

Page

167

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog application

168

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

The analog application

Introduction to the analog application on Micro

At a Glance The application-specific analog function applies to: l l the analog interface built in to the Micro TSX 37-22 PLC the analog input/output modules inserted in a Micro PLC.

Before creating an application program, the physical operating environment in which it will be executed must be defined. In other words, the processor type and the input/ output modules used.

The use of analog inputs/outputs (built-in analog interface TSX 37-22 or analog modules), also requires the definition of the analog channel parameters used (input range, filtering level, etc.).

For this, the PL7 Micro software has the configuration editor (See Display of

Channel Parameters, p. 237) which is used to easily perform these operations.

When the application is working online this editor also has a debug function (See

Display of Channel Parameters, p. 255) which is used to adjust certain parameters

(filtering, for example) so as to best adapt them to the application.

169

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog application

170

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in analog interface

Chapter overview

This chapter introduces the analog interface built-in to the Micro TSX 37-22 PLC.

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

16.1

16.2

16.3

Topic

Built-in analog interface

Input processing

Output processing

Page

172

174

180

171

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

integrated analog

16.1 Built-in analog interface

Introducing the built-in analog interface

General

Diagram

TSX 37-22 PLCs incorporate as standard an analog interface which contains: l Eight 0-10 V input channels (convertible to 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA inputs by using shunts built in to the TSX ACZ 03 module) l One 0-10 V output channel

This interface can meet the demands of applications which require analog processing, but where the performance and characteristics of an industrial measurement device are not justified.

Graphic representation of the interface functions:

1 output

0-10 V

1 output ref. 10 V

Conversion

A/D

D/A

Processes

Under/Overshoots

Sensor check

Filtering

Display

Refreshing

Fault handling

Voltage reference

Bus interface BUS

172

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Functions integrated analog

The table below details the interface functions:

Numbers Functions

1 Scanning input channels using static multiplexing and value acquisition.

2 Analog/digital conversion over 8 bits (256 pulses) successive approximation of input measurements.

Filtering input measurements.

Refreshing the digital output value by the processor.

Digital/analog conversion of the output value over 8 bits (256 pulses).

Handling of processor dialog faults and particularly setting the output to fallback.

Providing a reference voltage for external potentiometers or those in the adjustment and adaptation module TSX ACZ 03.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

173

integrated analog

16.2 Input processing

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section?

What's in this

Section?

This section introduces the different functions of the analog inputs of the interface built in to the Micro PLC.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Timing of measurements

Under/overshoot monitoring on inputs

Sensor link monitoring

Measurement filtering

Displaying measurements

Page

174

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

integrated analog

Timing of measurements

General

Normal cycle

The timing of measurements depends on the cycle used, defined at configuration

(See

Modification of the Scanning Cycle, p. 242): normal cycle or fast cycle.

The input scanning cycle is fixed and has a value of 32 ms, independent of the number of inputs used.

Example of a scanning cycle using only channels 2, 3, 8, and 9:

Channel 2

4 ms

Channel 3 Channel 8

4 ms

Scaning cycle = 32 ms

4 ms

Channel 9

4 ms

Fast cycle Only the channels used are scanned, even if these are not consecutive. This improves the cycle time for scanning the channels.

The cycle time for scanning the channels is given by the formula:

Cycle time (ms) = 4 ms x N

N = number of channels used

For example, if 4 channels are used, the scanning cycle time will be:

4 x 4 = 16 ms

Illustration:

Channel 2

4 ms

Channel 4 Channel 6

4 ms 4 ms

Scanning cycle = 4 x 4 = 16 ms

Channel 9

4 ms

Note: In fast cycle, the user can assign the channels to FAST task (See

Modification of the Task Assigned to the Module Inputs, p. 243)

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

175

integrated analog

Under/overshoot monitoring on inputs

At a Glance

Overshoot values

For each of the analog inputs the interface carries out a range overshoot check, by checking that the measurement remains below the upper limit. If this is not the case, saturation of the measurement string is likely. An overshoot fault is signaled by a bit which can be used by the system.

Inputs allow a range overshoot of 2% of the upper limits on the full scale.

The table below gives the measurement limits for each range:

Range Lower limit Upper limit

0...10 V

0...20 mA

4..20 mA

3.2 mA

+ 10.2 V

+ 20.4 mA

Whole values available by default

0...10200

- 500... + 10250

Note: The interface only detects an overshoot on the upper limit in the range 4-20 mA: 3.2 mA corresponds to - 500.

Under/overshoot identifiers

In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement string saturation.

On under/overshoot, the acquisition of inputs continues, but they are signaled as invalid.

Limit under/overshoots are signaled by the following bits:

Bit name

%I0.i.ERR

%MW0.i.2:X1

Meaning (when = 1)

Channel i fault

Exchange type

Implicit

Range over/undershoot on channel i Explicit

Note: For inputs integrated into the module, position x of the model is equal to 0 and the i channels are between 2 and 9.

176

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

integrated analog

Sensor link monitoring

At a Glance

Fault bit

This checking is available in the range 4-20 mA. In this range the fault is detected by the interface when the intensity in the loop becomes smaller than 3.2 mA.

The sensor link fault is signaled by a status word bit for explicit exchange which can be used by the system.

Sensor link fault bit:

Bit name

%MW0.i.2:X0

Meaning (for Xj = 1)

Sensor link fault on channel i

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

177

integrated analog

Measurement filtering

At a Glance

Mathematical formula

The system uses first order filtering.

The filtering coefficient can be modified from the PL7 screen (See Modification of the

Filtering Value, p. 247) or via the program.

The mathematical formula used is as follows :

Mesf n = α × ( – 1 ) + ( 1 – α ) × Valb n with:

α = filter efficiency,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,

Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,

Valg(n)=gross value at moment n.

At configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values (0 to 6). This value can be changed, even when the application is in RUN mode.

Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle mode.

Filter values The filter values are as follows:

Required efficiency

No filtering

Low filtering

Medium filtering 3

High filtering 5

Value to be selected

corresponding

0,750

0,875

0,937

0,969

0,984

0,992

Filter response time

Cut-off frequency

(Hz)

111 ms

240 ms

1,431

0,664

496 ms

1,01s

2.03 s

4.08 ms

0,321

0,158

0,078

0,039

178

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

integrated analog

Displaying measurements

At a Glance

Standardized display

All the measurements given to the application are in standardized display, and can be applied directly by the user.

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also with symbol °/

°°°

) from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

to 10000 °/

°°°

)

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

179

integrated analog

16.3 Output processing

Output characteristics

Writing output

Overflow monitoring

The application must provide values in a standardized format to the output: 0 to

+10000.

The values must be written in the word %QW0.10.

If the value provided by the application is less than 0 or greater than 10000, the analog output saturates to 0 V or + 10 V.

An overflow bit usable by the program is then positioned to 1.

Bit Name

%I0.10.ERR

Meaning

Channel 10 fault (analog output)

Digital / analog conversion

Refreshing the output

Fallback value

Digital / analog conversion is carried out on 8 bits:

The value provided by the application program (0 to 10000) is automatically transformed into a digital value which can be used by the converter.

Output is refreshed at the end of the MAST task or the FAST task, depending on the selection made at configuration (See Modifying the task to which the output is

assigned, p. 250).

The output takes the fallback value: l l l l

If dialog with the PLC is no longer possible

If the PLC switches to STOP mode

These fallback values are selected at configuration (See Modification of the Fallback

Mode, p. 249)

Possible options are:

Value 0

Maintained at the last value sent

180

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog input modules TSX AEZ

801 / TSX AEZ 802

Chapter overview

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the analog input modules TSX AEZ 801 and TSX AEZ 802 for the Micro PLC.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introduction to the TSX AEZ 801/TSX AEZ 802 modules

Timing of measurements

Range selection and input overflow monitoring

Sensor link checking on TSX AEZ 802

What happens to the module in the event of an overload

Measurement filtering

Displaying measurements

Page

181

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AEZ 801 / 802

Introduction to the TSX AEZ 801/TSX AEZ 802 modules

General

Diagram

The TSX AEZ 801 and TSX AEZ 802 modules offer eight high level analog inputs, with common features.

For each of its inputs, the TSX AEZ 801 module offers the range 10 v or 0-10 v, depending on the selection made at configuration.

For each of its inputs, the TSX AEZ 802 module offers a range 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, depending on the selection made at configuration (See Modification of the Input

Range, p. 244).

Graphic representation of the module functions:

1000 Vrms insulation

Channel selection (0 to 7)

Conversion

Optocoupler

A/D

Optocoupler

Bus interface

BUS

DC converter

Functions

182

The table below shows the module functions:

Numbers Functions

1 Scanning input channels using static multiplexing and value acquisition

2 Digital/analog conversion (12 bits) of input measurements

The PLC processor completes the following functions:

Input under/overshoot monitoring

Measurement filtering

User-defined input measurement formatting for display in a unit which can be applied directly

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AEZ 801 / 802

Timing of measurements

General

Normal cycle

The timing of measurements depends on the cycle used, defined at configuration

(See

Modification of the Scanning Cycle, p. 242): normal cycle or fast cycle.

The input scanning cycle is fixed and has a value of 32 ms, independent of the number of inputs used.

Example of a scanning cycle using only channels 0, 1, 6, and 7:

Fast cycle

Channel 0

4 ms

Channel 1 Channel 6

4 ms

Scaning cycle = 32 ms

4 ms

Channel 7

4 ms

Only the channels used are scanned, even if they are not consecutive. This helps to improve the channel scanning cycle time.

The cycle time for scanning the channels is given by the formula:

Cycle time (ms) = 4 ms x N

N = number of channels used

For example, if 4 channels are used, the scanning cycle time will be:

4 x 4 = 16 ms

Illustration:

Channel 1 Channel 3 Channel 5 Channel 7

4 ms 4 ms 4 ms

Scanning cycle = 4 x 4 = 16 ms

4 ms

Note: In fast cycle, the user can assign the channels to FAST task (See

Modification of the Task Assigned to the Module Inputs, p. 243). In this case, it is

recommended that you do not assign too many analog input modules to the FAST task,

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

183

AEZ 801 / 802

Range selection and input overflow monitoring

Range selection Each module gives a choice (See

Modification of the Input Range, p. 244) between

two ranges for each of its inputs.

For the TSX AEZ 801 module: l l l l

+/- 10 V

0-10 V

For the TSX AEZ 802 module:

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

Generally, the modules allow a range overshoot of 5% on the full scale.

Overshoot values

Range

The table below gives the limits for the TSX AEZ 801 module:

+/- 10 V

0...10 V

Range

0...20 mA

4..20 mA

Lower limit

- 10.5 V

- 0.5 V

Upper limit

+ 10.5 V

Whole values available by default

+/- 10500

- 500...10500

The table below gives the limits for the TSX AEZ 802 module:

Lower limit Upper limit

- 1 mA

+ 3.2 mA

+ 21 mA

+ 20.8 mA

Whole values available by default

- 500...10500

Note: In the case of unipolar ranges (0…10 V, 0…20 mA), the module detects an undershoot. A fault is signaled at - 5% of the scale, which allows a quicker diagnostic at implementation and in operation.

Under/overshoot identifiers

Bit name

%Ix.i.ERR

%MWx.i.2:X1

In the over/undershoot zones, there is a risk of measurement string saturation.

On under/overshoot, the acquisition of inputs continues, but they are signaled as invalid.

Under/overshoots are signaled by the following bits (usable by the program):

Meaning (when = 1)

Fault on channel i of the module in position x

Exchange type

Implicit

Range under/overshoot on channel i of the module in position x Explicit

184

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AEZ 801 / 802

Sensor link checking on TSX AEZ 802

At a Glance

Fault bit

This checking is available in the range 4-20 mA. In this range the fault is detected by the TSX AEZ 802 module when the intensity in the loop becomes less than 3.2 mA.

The sensor link fault is signaled by a status word bit for explicit exchange which can be used by the system.

Sensor link fault bit:

Bit name

%MWx.i.2:X0

Meaning (for Xj = 1)

Sensor link fault on channel i of module x

Note: The channels of a TSX AEZ 802 module which have not been hardwired should preferably be set between 0-20 mA. If this is not the case, a "sensor link" fault will be signaled by the module.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

185

AEZ 801 / 802

What happens to the module in the event of an overload

General In the event of a surcharge – an under/overshoot on the upper (10500) or lower limit

(-10500), the module signals a range under/overshoot fault.

What happens to the module

What happens to the module in relation to the overload value:

Overload type

Overload of less than 14 VDC

(positive or negative)

Overload between 14 VDC and 30

VDC (positive or negative)

Overload greater than 30 VDC

(positive or negative)

What happens to the module Comments

The measurement string is saturated to the value of the passed limit (10500 or -10500).

The under/overshoot is not destructive for the module.

The measurement provided by the module is non-significant.

The under/overshoot is not destructive for the module.

The range overshoot is signaled while the module can.

The under/overshoot can be irreversibly destructive for the module.

186

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AEZ 801 / 802

Measurement filtering

At a Glance

Mathematical formula

The system uses first order filtering.

The filtering coefficient can be modified (See Modification of the Filtering Value,

p. 247) from the PL7 screen or via the program.

The mathematical formula used is as follows :

Mesf n = α × ( – 1 ) + ( 1 – α ) × Valb n with:

α = filter efficiency,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at moment n,

Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at moment n-1,

Valg(n)=gross value at moment n.

At configuration, the user selects the filter value from seven possible values (0 to 6).

This value can be changed, even when the application is in RUN mode.

Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle mode.

Filter values The filter values are as follows:

Required efficiency

No filtering

Low filtering

Medium filtering 3

High filtering 5

Value to be selected

corresponding

0,750

0,875

0,937

0,969

0,984

0,992

Filter response time

Cut-off frequency

(Hz)

111 ms

240 ms

1,431

0,664

496 ms

1,01s

2.03 s

4.08 ms

0,321

0,158

0,078

0,039

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

187

AEZ 801 / 802

Filtering and cycle time

The module continues its acquisitions and therefore its filtering calculations regardless of the cycle time of the application task.

For example:

If the cycle of the MAST task is 120 ms (module used in normal cycle), the module will have taken into account three or four new gross values per channel, before the

MAST task reads the measurement value.

Illustration:

120 ms

Start of cycle Start of cycle

MAST task cycle

Measurement acknowledgement

Available measurement

Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation

Filtering

Module cycle

Channel n gross value

32 ms

Channel n gross value

32 ms

Channel n gross value

32 ms

Channel n gross value

32 ms

Channel n gross value

If the cycle of the MAST task is 10 ms, the module will only provide a new value every three or four cycles of the MAST task.

188

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AEZ 801 / 802

Illustration:

10 ms

Available measurement

MAST task cycle

Measurement acknowledgement

Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation

Filtering

Module cycle

Channel n gross value

32 ms

Channel n gross value

32 ms

Channel n gross value

32 ms

Channel n gross value

32 ms

Channel n gross value

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

189

AEZ 801 / 802

Displaying measurements

At a Glance

Standardized display

User display

The measurement provided to the application can be applied directly by the user, l l who can choose (See

Modification of the Display Format, p. 245) between:

using standardized display 0-10000 (or +/- 10000 for the range +/-10 V) creating parameters for its display format by indicating the minimum and maximum values required.

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimal places, also with symbol °/

°°°

Different standardized formats for each range:

Reference Display Range

Unipolar:

0-10 V

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

Bipolar:

+/- 10 V

TSX AEZ 801 from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

TSX AEZ 802 from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

TSX AEZ 802 from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

to 10000 °/

°°°

to 10000 °/

°°°

)

TSX AEZ 801 from -10000 to +10000 (-10000 °/

°°°

)

to +10000 °/

The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: l the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum 0 °/

°°°

(or -10000 °/

°°°

) l the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum 10000 °/

These minimum and maximum limits should be integers between -30000 and

+30000.

190

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog input modules TSX AEZ

414

Chapter overview

This chapter introduces the analog input modules TSX AEZ 414 for the Micro PLC.

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TSX AEZ 414 module

Timing of measurements

Range selection and input overshoot monitoring

Sensor link monitoring

What happens to the module in the event of an overload

Measurement filtering

Displaying measurements

Page

191

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AEZ 414

Introducing the TSX AEZ 414 module

General

Diagram

The TSX AEZ 414 module is a multi-range acquisition device with four differential inputs.

The TSX AEZ 414 module offers the following ranges for each of its inputs according to the selection made at configuration (See

Modification of the Input Range, p. 244):

l l l

Thermocouple B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T or U

Thermowell Pt100 or Ni100 in two or four wires

High level +/- 10 V, 0-10 V, 0-5 V (0-20 mA with an external shunt). It should be noted that the external shunts are supplied with the product.

Graphic representation of the interface functions:

500 Vrms insulation

Channel selection (0 to 3)

Gain selection

Optocoupler

Input multiplexing A/D

Optocoupler

Bus interface

BUS

Internal temperature sensor

DC converter

192

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Functions

AEZ 414

The table below details the interface functions:

Input range selection for each channel.

Scanning input channels using multiplexing and value acquisition.

Digital/analog conversion (16 bits) of input measurements.

Under/overshoot checking for input values according to the declared range.

Linearization in the case of thermowells Pt100 and Ni100.

Linearization and internal or external cold junction compensation for thermocouples.

User-defined input measurement formatting for display in units which can be applied directly (physical unit or user range).

Detection of a sensor link fault in thermocouple ranges.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

193

AEZ 414

Timing of measurements

General

Measurement sequence

The cycle time of the TSX AEZ 414 module and consequently the sampling period are independent from the power frequency (50 Hz or 60 Hz).

Internal module temperature (cold junction) acquisition is added to the full acquisition of the four channels

The measurements are sequenced in the following manner:

Tcycle = 520 ms

Tchannel

Value of available channel n

New value of available channel n

Scanning time

Internal temp.

Channel

Internal temp.

Channel

The scanning cycle is always identical even if some channels or the internal temperature are not used. It is equal to 520 ms.

The table below shows the module scanning times:

Time

Acquisition time for a channel

Scanning cycle time

Abbreviation

Channel T

T cycle

Value

104 ms

520 ms

Note: Module initialization can take up to 1.5 s. During this time the channels are signaled "not ready" by bit 8 of the channel status word: %MWx.i.2:X8

194

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AEZ 414

Range selection and input overshoot monitoring

Range selection

Range under/ overshoot l l l l l l

Using the software the user can select (See

Modification of the Input Range, p. 244),

for each of the channels, one of the following ranges:

+/- 10 V

0-10 V

0-5 V (or 0-20 mA with external shunt)

1-5 V (or 4-20 mA with external shunt)

Thermowells Pt100, Ni1000

Thermocouples B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U

For thermocouple ranges, the module provides cold junction compensation.

However, the cold junction temperature can be measured either on the module terminal block (by a probe inside the module), or remotely by using an external Class

A Pt100 probe (not supplied) on channel 0. This parameter is selected at configuration (See

Zone 3, p. 238).

Depending on the range the under/overshoot values are as follows: l For the "bipolar voltage" range +/- 10 V, the range under/overshoot corresponds to a value outside the range +/- 105% of the full scale.

l For the "unipolar voltage" range, the range under/overshoot corresponds to a value outside the range - 5% and + 105% of the full scale.

l For temperature measurements using thermocouples, the range under/ overshoot corresponds to: l l either a standardized sensor zone under/overshoot.

or under/overshoot of the acquisition device dynamic.

l or an under/overshoot of the compensation temperature dynamic (- 5 °C to +

85 °C).

Using the internal compensation at a normative ambiance (0 °C to + 60 °C) is l compatible with the thresholds - 5 °C and 85 °C.

For temperature measurements using thermowells, the range under/overshoot corresponds to: l l

Either an under/overshoot of the acquisition device dynamic (due to a sensor or cabling anomaly).

Or a standardized sensor zone under/overshoot.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

195

AEZ 414

Under/overshoot monitoring

Whatever the chosen range, range under/overshoots are monitored. The module checks that the measurement falls between a lower and upper limit. Outside these limits, saturation of the measurement string is likely.

The table below gives the under/overshoot limits for the electrical ranges:

Range

+/- 10 V

0...10 V

0...5 V (0...20 mA)

1...5 V (4...20 mA)

Lower limit

- 10.5 V

- 0.5 V

- 0.25 V (-1 mA)

+ 0.8 V (+ 3.2 mA)

Upper limit

+ 10.5 V

+ 5.25 V (+21 mA)

+ 5.2 V (+ 20.8 mA)

The table below gives the under/overshoot limits for the thermocouple ranges:

Range

Lower limit

- 270

C (- 454

F )

- 210

C (- 436

F )

- 270

C (- 454

F )

- 200

C (- 328

F )

- 270

C (- 454

F )

- 50

C (- 58

F )

- 50

- 270

- 200

(- 58

(- 454

(- 328

)

Upper limit

+ 812

C (+ 1493

F )

+ 1065

C (+ 1949

F )

+ 1372

C (+ 2502

F )

+ 900

C (+ 1652

F )

+ 1300

C (+ 2372

F )

+ 1769

C (+ 3216

F )

+ 1769

C (+ 3216

F )

+ 400

C (+ 752

F )

+ 600

C (+ 1112

F )

The limits are given for the following conditions:

In internal compensation the ambient temperature is 25 °C,

In external compensation, the cold junction temperature is 30 °C.

The table below gives the under/overshoot limits for the thermowell ranges:

Range

Pt100

Ni1000

Lower limit

- 200

° C (- 328

° F )

- 60

° C (- 76

° F )

Upper limit

+ 850

° C (+ 1562

° F )

+ 110

° C (+ 230

° F )

196

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AEZ 414

Note: In the event of a range under/overshoot, the given value saturates to the value of the limit passed:

Example for range 4-20 mA

Displayed value

+ 10500

- 500

Measured value

Range overflow

Tolerated overflows

Under/overshoot identifiers

The program can use range/under overshoot error bits.

Limit under/overshoots are signaled by the following bits:

Bit name

%Ix.i.ERR

%MWx.i.2:X1

Meaning (when = 1)

Fault on channel i of the module in position x

Range under/overshoot on channel i of the module in position x

Exchange type

Implicit

Explicit

Note: For thermocouple ranges, the %Ix.i.ERR bit is also set to 1 for a sensor link anomaly.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

197

AEZ 414

Sensor link monitoring

At a Glance

Fault bit

Sensor link monitoring is only done for measurements by thermocouples. However, a range under/overshoot in the range 4-20 mA (< 3.2 mA) does not cause a sensor link fault.

The sensor link fault corresponds to an open circuit on the thermocouple input.

Acknowledgement is not completely synchronous with its appearance; it can be delayed by a maximum of three "module cycles", or 1560 ms. This is the same for the disappearance of the fault.

The sensor link fault is signaled by a status word bit for explicit exchange which can be used by the system.

Sensor link fault bit:

Bit name

%MWx.i.2:X0

Meaning (for Xj = 1)

Sensor link fault on channel i of module x

198

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AEZ 414

What happens to the module in the event of an overload

General In the event of a surcharge, that is an under/overshoot on the upper or lower limit, the module signals a range under/overshoot fault.

What happens to the module

What happens to the module in relation to the overload value:

Overload type

Overload of less than 15 VDC

(positive or negative)

Overload between 15 VDC and 30

VDC (positive or negative)

Overload greater than 30 VDC

(positive or negative)

What happens to the module

The channel to channel crosstalk is not changed

The channel to channel crosstalk makes all the module inputs unusable.

Comments

The under/overshoot is not destructive for the module.

The range overshoot is signaled while the module can.

The under/overshoot can be irreversibly destructive for the module.

Note: A sensor link fault with a 2 wire thermowell can lead to saturation of the input concerned, at a voltage between 15 VDC and 30 VDC and thus make the module inputs unusable.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

199

AEZ 414

Measurement filtering

At a Glance

Filter values

The system uses first order filtering.

The filtering coefficient can be modified (See Modification of the Filtering Value,

p. 247) from the PL7 screen or via the program.

At configuration, the user selects the filter value from seven possible values (0 to 6).

The filter values are as follows:

Required efficiency

No filtering

Low filtering

Medium filtering 3

High filtering 5

Value to be selected

0 0

corresponding

0,750

0,875

0,937

0,969

0,984

0,992

Filter response time

Cut-off frequency

(Hz)

1.81 s

3.89 s

8.06 s

16.4 s

33 s

66.3 s

Hardware filtering

0,0879

0,0409

0,0197

0,0097

0,0048

0,0024

Note: Measurement filtering is suspended when execution of the MAST task is interrupted at a breakpoint (in the debugging phase). When the breakpoint is cleared, filtering restarts without recognizing the inputs acquired during the stopped period.

200

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

AEZ 414

Displaying measurements

At a Glance

Electrical ranges:

Standardized display

Electrical ranges: User display

Temperature range

This process is used to select (See

Modification of the Display Format, p. 245) the

display format depending on which formats are provided in the user program: l l

Standardized display

User display

It is necessary to differentiate between the electrical ranges and the thermocouple or thermowell ranges.

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimal places, also with symbol °/

°°°

Different standardized formats for each range:

Display Range

Unipolar:

0-10 V

0-5 V (0-20 mA)

1-5 V (4-20 mA)

Bipolar:

+/- 10 V from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

to 10000 °/

°°°

) from -10000 to +10000 (-10000 °/

°°°

)

to +10000 °/ l l

The user can select the value range in which the measurements are expressed, by selecting: the minimum limit corresponding to the range minimum 0 °/

°°°

(or -10000 °/ ) the maximum limit corresponding to the range maximum 10000 °/

°°°

+30000

The user can choose between two types of display: l Temperature display . The values are provided by default in tenths of a degree: l l tenth of a degree Celsius, if the unit chosen at configuration is ° C tenth of a degree Fahrenheit, if the unit chosen at configuration is ° F l Standardized display . The user can select standardized display 0-10000 (i.e. 0 to 10000 °/

°°°

), by specifying the minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and 10000.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

201

AEZ 414

202

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog output module TSX ASZ

401

Chapter overview

This chapter introduces the analog output module TSX ASZ 401 for Micro PLCs.

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TSX ASZ 401module

Writing and updating outputs

Fault handling

Page

204

205

206

203

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

ASZ 401

Introducing the TSX ASZ 401 module

General

Diagram

The TSX ASZ 401 module offers four analog outputs with common features and for each of them offers the range +/- 10 V, with no energy supply (no external supply) with a load of at least 2 K Ω .

Graphical representation of the interface functions:

BUS

Bus interface

1000 Vrms insulation

Transmission of 2 simultaneous channels

Optocoupler

Channel selection (0 to 1)

Conversion

D/A

Optocoupler

D/A

DC converter

Functions The table below shows the functions of the modules:

Acknowledgment of the digital values corresponding to the analog values to be obtained on exit. These values are calculated by the PLC task to which the channels are assigned.

Handling of processor dialog faults and particularly setting the output to fallback.

Digital/analog output value conversion on 11 bits + sign (-2048 to +2047). Realignment is carried out in the dynamic of the converter.

204

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

ASZ 401

Writing and updating outputs

Writing outputs

Updating outputs

The application must provide values to the outputs in a standardized format - 10000 to +10000.

The outputs of the TSX ASZ 401 module are updated two at a time at the end of the task to which they are assigned (See Modifying the task to which the output is

assigned, p. 250).

Example:

Suppose that channels 0 and 1 are assigned to the FAST task which has a cycle time of 2 ms and channels 2 and 3 are assigned to the MAST task which has a cycle time of 23 ms. Channel updating will be as follows:

2 ms

Task cycle FAST

Channel 0 update

Channel 1 update

Channel 2 update

Channel 3 update

Task cycle MAST

End of cycle

23 ms

Note: As the channels are grouped 0/1 and 2/3, it is not possible to assign channels 0 and 2 to a task (for example MAST) and 1, 3 to another task (for example FAST).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

205

ASZ 401

Fault handling

Under/overshoot monitoring

If the values given by the application are less that -10000 or greater than +10000, the outputs saturate to - 10 V or + 10 V.

An overshoot bit which can be used by the program is then set to 1.

Bit address

%Ix.i.ERR

%MWx.i.2:X1

Meaning (for Xj = 1)

Fault on channel i of module x

Range overshoot fault

Output fallback When the PLC switches into STOP mode or dialog with the processor is no longer possible, the outputs assume the fallback value 0 or are maintained at the last value transmitted, according to the choice made at configuration (See Modification of the

Fallback Mode, p. 249) for the module.

206

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog output module TSX ASZ

200

Chapter overview

This chapter introduces the analog output module TSX ASZ 200 for Micro PLCs.

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introducing the TSX ASZ 200 module

Writing and updating outputs

Fault handling

Fault Processing

Page

207

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

ASZ 200

Introducing the TSX ASZ 200 module

General

Diagram

The TSX ASZ 200 module offers two analog outputs with common features and offers for each the following ranges (See Modification of the Output Range (TSX

ASZ 200 and TSX AMZ 600), p. 251), with no energy supply (no external supply):

l l l

-/+10 V with a minimum load of 1 K Ω

0-20 mA with a maximum load of 600

Ω

4-20 mA with a maximum load of 600

Ω

Graphical representation of the interface functions:

1500 Vrms insulation

Transmission of 2 simultaneous channels

BUS

Bus interface

Optocoupler

Conversion

D/A

Current amplifier

Voltage amplifier

Current amplifier

Voltage amplifier

2 outputs

+/- 10 V and

0-20 mA

Functions

208

DC converter

The table below shows the functions of the modules:

Acknowledgment of the digital values corresponding to the analog values to be obtained on output. These values are calculated by the PLC task to which the channels are assigned.

Handling of processor dialog faults and particularly setting the output to fallback.

Range selection for each output: voltage or current.

Digital/analog conversion of output values: on 11 bits + sign (-2048 to +2047) in the range +/- 10 V, on 11 bits (0 to +2047) in the ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA.

Realignment is carried out in the dynamic of the converter by the module.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

ASZ 200

Writing and updating outputs

Writing outputs

Updating outputs

The application must provide values in a standardized format to the outputs: l l

-10000 to +10000 in the range +/-10 V.

0 to + 10000 in the ranges 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA. The value 0 corresponding to

4 mA in the range 4-20 mA.

The two outputs of the TSX ASZ 200 module are updated at the end of the task to which they are assigned (See Modifying the task to which the output is assigned,

p. 250).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

209

ASZ 200

Fault handling

Under/overshoot monitoring

The output saturation values according to the range are as follows:

Ranges Saturation value

+/- 10 V

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

Values provided by the application

Less than -10000

More than + 10000

Less than 0

More than + 10000

Less than 0

More than + 10000

- 10 V

+ 10 V

0 mA

20 mA

4 mA

20 mA

An overshoot bit which can be used by the program is then set to 1:

Bit address

%Ix.i.ERR

%MWx.i.2:X1

Meaning

Fault on channel i of module x

Range under/overshoot fault

Output fallback When the PLC switches into STOP mode, the outputs take the fallback value 0 (4mA in the range 4-20 mA) or are maintained at the last transmitted value, according to the selection made during configuration (See Modification of the Fallback Mode,

p. 249) of the module.

When dialog with the processor is no longer possible, the outputs take the fallback value 0 V (voltage range) or 0 mA (current range).

210

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

ASZ 200

Fault Processing

Overshoot

Monitoring

The saturation values of the outputs according to the range are the following:

Ranges Saturation value

+/- 10 V

+/- 10V

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

Values provided by the application

Less than - 10000

More than + 10000

Less than 0

More than + 10000

Less than 0

More than + 10000

Less than 0

More than + 10000

- 10 V

+ 10 V

0 V

+10 V

0 mA

20 mA

4 mA

20 mA

An overshoot bit, which can be run by the program, is then positioned at 1:

Bit address

%Ix.i.ERR

%MWx.i.2:X1

Meaning

Fault in channel i of the module x

Range overshoot fault

Output Fallback When the PLC changes to STOP, the outputs take the fallback value 0 (4 mA in the range 4-20 mA) or are kept at the last transmitted value, according to the choice made in configuration (See

Modification of the Fallback Mode, p. 249) for the

module.

When dialog with the processor is no longer possible, the outputs take the fallback value 0 V (voltage range) or 0 mA (current range).

Write Output The application must provide outputs with values in standardized format.

l l

-10000 to +10000 in the range +/- 10V,

0 to +10000 in the ranges 0-10V, 0-20mA and 4-20mA.

Refresh Outputs The two outputs of the TSX AMZ 600 module are updated at the end of the task

(********************see modification of task p255 **************) to which they are assigned.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

211

ASZ 200

212

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

TSX AMZ 600 Analog Module

Introduction to the Chapter

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the TSX AMZ 600 analog input/output module for Micro

PLCs.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introduction to the TSX AMZ 600 Module

Measuring Speed

Selection of Ranges and Monitoring of Input Overshoots

Monitoring of Sensor Link on TSX AMZ 600

Module Behavior in Event of Overload

Filtering of Measurements

Display of Current Values

Page

213

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

TSX AMZ 600

Introduction to the TSX AMZ 600 Module

General

Synopsis

The AMZ 600 module offers 4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs of a high level.

This module does not have isolation between input and output channels. For each of its input and output channels the TSX AMZ 600 offers 2 voltage ranges (+/- 10V,

0-10V) and 2 current ranges (0-20mA, 4-20mA) according to the selection made in configuration (See

Modification of the Input Range, p. 244).

The diagram below represents the internal structure of the module:

Isolation 1000Veff

BUS

Interface

Bus

Convert

D/A

Opto

Module

Convert

D/A

Selection channel 0 to 3

Opto

Module

Convert

A/D

Voltage amplifier

Current amplifier

Voltage amplifier

Current amplifier

Multiplexer

Converter DC/DC

214

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Functions

TSX AMZ 600

The paragraph below gives the input and output functions of the module: l Input functions: l l scanning of the input channels by static multiplexing and acquisition of the values, analog/digital conversion (11 signed bits) of the input readings l l l l l monitoring input overshoot, current value filtering, user formatting the current input values for a directly operating individual display.

Output functions: accepting the digital values which correspond to the analog values to be obtained at outputs. These values are calculated by the PLC task to which the channels are assigned, l l l the processing of dialog faults with the PLC and in particular setting output fallback, selecting the range for each voltage and current output, numeric/analog conversion of the output values.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

215

TSX AMZ 600

Measuring Speed

General

Normal Cycle

The measuring speed depends on the cycle used, which is defined in configuration

(See

Modification of the Scanning Cycle, p. 242): normal cycle or fast cycle.

The input scanning cycle is fixed and has a value of 16 ms, irrespective of the number of inputs used.

Example of a scanning cycle with channels 0 and 3 used:

Channel 0

4 ms

Scanning cycle = 16 ms

Channel 3

4 ms

216

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Fast Cycle

TSX AMZ 600

Only the channels being used are scanned, even if these are not consecutive, which gives an improved channel scanning cycle time.

The channel scanning cycle time is given by the formula:

Cycle time (ms) = 4 ms x N

N = number of channels used

For example, if 2 channels are used, the scanning cycle time will be:

2 x 4 = 8 ms

Illustration:

Channel 0 Channel 1

4 ms 4 ms

Scanning cycle = 2*4 = 8 ms

Note: In fast cycle, the user is able to assign the channels in FAST task (See

Modification of the Task Assigned to the Module Inputs, p. 243). In this case, it is

recommended not to assign too many analog input modules to the FAST task.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

217

TSX AMZ 600

Selection of Ranges and Monitoring of Input Overshoots

Selection of

Ranges

Overshoot

Values

Each module offers the choice (See

Modification of the Input Range, p. 244)

between two ranges for each of its inputs.

For the TSX AMZ 600 module: l l l l

+/- 10 V

0-10 V

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

For each of the analog inputs, the interface carries out monitoring of range overrun, by checking that the current value remains less than the upper limit. If this is not the case, there is the probability of the analog measurement system being saturated. An overshoot fault is shown by a bit that can be used by the system.

In general, the modules allow a range overshoot of 5% on the full scale.

The table below gives the limits for the TSX AMZ 600 module:

Range Lower limit Upper limit

+/- 10 V

0...10 V

0...20 mA

4...20 mA

- 10.5 V

- 0.5 V

- 1 mA

+ 3.2 mA

+ 10.5 V

+ 21 mA

+ 20.8 mA

Whole values available by default

+/- 10500

- 500...10500

Overshoot

Indications

Note: In the case of unipolar ranges (0-10 V, 0 − 20 mA), the module detects a negative overshoot. A fault is indicated at - 5% from the scale, which allows faster diagnostics during set-up and operation.

In the overshoot zones there is a risk of saturation of the analog measurement system.

On overshoot, the acquisition of inputs continues, but these are denoted as not valid.

Overshoot of the limits is indicated by the following bits (can be run by program):

Bit name

%Ix.i.ERR

%MWx.i.2:X1

Meaning (when = 1)

Fault in channel i of the module in position x

Range overshoot on channel i of the module in position x

Type of exchange

Implicit

Explicit

218

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

TSX AMZ 600

Monitoring of Sensor Link on TSX AMZ 600

At a Glance

Default Bit

Monitoring is offered in the range 4-20 mA. In this range a fault is detected by the

TSX AMZ 600 module when the intensity in the loop falls below 3.2 mA.

The sensor link fault is indicated by an explicit exchange status word bit, which can be run by the system.

Sensor link fault bit:

Bit name

%MWx.i.2:X0

Meaning (for Xj = 1)

Sensor link fault on channel i of the module x

Note: Non cabled channels of a TSX AMZ 600 module should preferably be parametrized in 0-20 mA. If this is not the case, a "sensor link" fault will be indicated by the module.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

219

TSX AMZ 600

Module Behavior in Event of Overload

General During an overload, i.e. an overshoot of the upper limit (10500) or lower limit (-

10500), the module indicates a range overshoot fault.

Module Behavior Behavior of module according to the overload value:

Type of overload Module Behavior

Overload less than 14 VDC (positive or negative)

The analog measurement system is saturated at the value of the limit overshoot (10500 or -10500).

Overload within 14 VDC and 30 VDC

(positive or negative)

The current value provided by the module is not significant.

Comments

Overshoot is not detrimental to the module.

The analog measurement system is saturated at the value of the limit overshoot (10500 or -500)

Overshoot is not detrimental to the module.

Overload more than 30 VDC (positive or negative)

The range overshoot fault is indicated as long as this is possible for the module.

The overshoot can be permanently detrimental to the module.

Overload of +/- 7.5 VDC

(current overload)

Overshoot is not detrimental to the module.

220

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

TSX AMZ 600

Filtering of Measurements

Introduction

Mathematical

Formula

The filtering done is a first order filtering.

The filtering coefficient can be modified (See Modification of the Filtering Value,

p. 247) from the PL7 screen or by program.

The mathematical formula used is the following:

Mesf n = α × ( – 1 ) + ( 1 – α ) × Valb n with:

α =efficiency of the filter,

Mesf(n)=measurement filtered at point n,

Mesf(n-1)=measurement filtered at the point n-1,

Valb(n)=gross value at point n.

During configuration, the user selects the filtering value from 7 possibilities (0 to 6).

This value can be modified, even when the application is in RUN.

Note: Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle.

Filtering Values The filtering values are the following:

Efficiency found

No filtering

Little filtering

Medium filtering 3

Strong filtering 5

Value to be selected

α corresponding

0,750

0,875

0,937

0,969

0,984

0,992

Filter response time

Outage frequency

(Hz)

111 ms

240 ms

1,431

0,664

496 ms

1.01s

2.03 s

4.08 s

0,321

0,158

0,078

0,039

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

221

TSX AMZ 600

Filtering and

Cycle Time

The module continues its acquisitions and thus its filtering calculation with no regard to the cycle time of the application task.

For example:

If the MAST task cycle is 60 ms (module used in normal cycle), the module will have accepted 3 or 4 new raw values per channel, before the MAST task comes to read the measurement value.

Illustration:

60 ms

Start of cycle Start of cycle

Cycle of the

MAST task

Accepting the current value

Available current value

Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation

Filtering

Module cycle

Channel n gross value

16 ms

Channel n gross value

16 ms

Channel n gross value

16 ms

Channel n gross value

16 ms

Channel n gross value

222

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

TSX AMZ 600

If the MAST task cycle is 10 ms, the module will only provide a new value every 2 or

3 cycles of the MAST task.

10 ms

Cycle of the

MAST task

Accepting the current value

Available current value

Calcul.

Filtering

Channel n gross value

16 ms

Channel n gross value

16 ms

Channel n gross value

16 ms

Channel n gross value

16 ms

Module cycle

223

TSX AMZ 600

Display of Current Values

Introduction

Standardized

Display

User Display

The current value supplied to the application can be directly run by the user who can l l choose (See

Modification of the Display Format, p. 245) between:

using the standardized display 0-10000 (or +/- 10000 for the range +/- 10V), parametrizing the display format by giving the minimum and maximum values required.

The values are displayed in standardized units (in % with 2 decimals, also symbolized °/

°°°

Different formats standardized according to the ranges:

Display Range

Unipolar:

0-10 V

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

Bipolar:

+/- 10 V from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°° from 0 to 10000 (0 °/

°°°

to 10000 °/

°°°

to 10000 °/

°°°

to 10000 °/

°°°

)

) from -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 °/

°°°

)

to +10.000 °/

The user can select the range of values in which the current values are expressed, by choosing: l the lower limit corresponding to the minimum value of the range 0 °/

°°°

(or -

10000°/

°°°

) l the upper limit corresponding to the maximum value of the range10.000 °/

°°°

These lower and upper limits are integers between - 30000 and + 30000.

224

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Configuring the analog application

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes the configuration of the analog modules on the PLC Micro

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

22.1

22.2

Topic

Reminder about the configuration editor

Accessing the analog application parameters

Page

226

230

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

225

Analog configuration

22.1 Reminder about the configuration editor

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section?

What's in this

Section?

This section contains a reminder about the use of the configuration editor for the analog application.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Accessing the configuration editor

Selection of Modules

Page

227

228

226

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog configuration

Accessing the configuration editor

Procedure To access the configuration editor:

1 Go to the application browser:

4 l Either by clicking on the application browser icon l Or by selecting the command Tools/Browser Application

Select and click on the Station folder.

Select and click on the Configuration folder.

Double click on the Hardware configuration icon.

Illustration:

Application Browser

STATION

Configuration

Hardware configuration

Software configuration

Grafcet objects configuration

Program

Mast task

Events

Variables

Animation tables

Documentation

Runtime Screens

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

227

Analog configuration

Selection of Modules

Procedure To select a module:

Double click on the position of the rack to be configured (for example 5).

The following dialog box appears:

Add a Module

Family:

Analog

Counting

Simulation

Discrete

1.5

1.0

1.5

Module:

TSX AEZ 414

TSX AEZ 801

TSX AEZ 802

TSX AMZ 600

TSX ASZ 200

TSX ASZ 401

4 DIFF. ANA. INP. 16 BITS

8 ANA. INPUTS + -10V

8 ANA. INPUTS 0-20MA

4 ANA. INPUTS/2 ANA. OUTPUTS

2 ANALOG OUTPUTS

4 ANA. OUTPUTS + -10V

Cancel

228

In the Family field, select the type of module (for example Analog).

In the Module field, select the reference of the module to be configured (for example TSX AEZ 801).

Confirm with OK : the module is now declared in its position (which is framed and contains the reference of the module).

Illustration:

TSX 3722 V5.0..

XMWI

XTI..

Configuration u n c o n g i t

A n a

TSX

3722

1 3

DMZ

28DTK

DMZ

64DTK

AEZ

801

2 4 6

Note: To delete a module from its position, select by clicking on it then press the <Delete> key, which brings up a dialog box. Then confirm the deletion of the module.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Limitations

Analog configuration

The limitations on the number of modules are as follows:

PLC type

TSX 37-10 + Extension

TSX 37-21/22 + Extension

TSX 37 base

Max. number of analog modules

2 modules TSX ASZ 200 and AMZ 600

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

229

Analog configuration

22.2 Accessing the analog application parameters

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section?

What's in this

Section?

This section describes the methods for accessing the analog application parameters.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Accessing Parameterization of the Integrated Analog Interface

Accessing Parameterization of an Analog Module

Page

231

232

230

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog configuration

Accessing Parameterization of the Integrated Analog Interface

Procedure access by double clicking on the representation of the analog interface:

Configuration

TSX 3722 V5.0...

XMWI

XTI..

C o u n n g i t

A n a

TSX

3722 c o m m

DMZ

28DTZ

AEZ

801

AMZ

600

AEZ

802

ASZ

401

ASZ

200

AEZ

414

Note: Only accessible if the PLC is a TSX 37-22

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

231

Analog configuration

Accessing Parameterization of an Analog Module

Procedure access by double clicking on the representation of the module to be configured (for example module TSX AMZ 600, positioned in slot 6):

Configuration

TSX 3722 V5.0...

XMWI

XTI..

i t n g

C o u n

A n a

TSX

3722 c o m m

DMZ

28DTZ

AEZ

801

AMZ

600

AEZ

802

ASZ

401

ASZ

200

AEZ

414

Parameterization can also be accessed via the Open module command on the Edit drop-down menu

232

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Configuration of analog channels

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the configuration of the analog module channels on the

Micro PLC

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

23.1

23.2

23.3

Topic

Channel configuration function - General

Modifying an input channel’s parameters

Modifying an output channel’s parameters

Page

234

241

248

233

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Configuration of analog channels

23.1 Channel configuration function - General

At a Glance

General

What's in this

Section?

This function, which can be accessed from each module, including the interface integrated into the base module TSX 37-22, is used to display and modify the parameters for each of the module channels (electrical range, measurement filtering, measurement display, etc.)

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Default Configuration of Channels

Display of Channel Parameters

Page

235

237

234

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Configuration of analog channels

Default Configuration of Channels

General If the channel parameters are not modified, these are configured with a default value.

Parameters

Module

Interface integrated

The default parameters of each of the analog modules are as follows (shown in bold in the table):

Display Filtering Number of channels

8 inputs (3)

Display format of the current value

0..10 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

0 to 10000 (1)

Task assignment

MAST

FAST (2)

0 ..6

1 output

TSX AEZ 801 8 inputs (3)

TSX AEZ 802 8 inputs (3)

TSX AEZ 414 4 inputs

TSX ASZ 401 4 outputs

0..10 V (1)

+/- 10 V

0..10 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

+/- 10 V

0..10 V

0..5 V ( 0..20 mA)

1..5 V ( 4..20 mA)

Pt100, Ni1000

Thermocouple type B, E, J, K, L, N,

R, S, T, U

+/- 10 V

0 to 10000 (1)

-10000 to +10000 (%..)

User

0 to 10000 (%..)

User

-10000 to +10000 (%..)

User

0 to 10000 (1/10

1/10

%..

° C

-10000 to +10000 (1)

)

MAST

FAST

MAST

FAST (2)

MAST

FAST (2)

MAST

FAST (2)

0 ..6

TSX ASZ 200 2 outputs +/- 10 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

(1) This parameter can not be modified

(2) Only in fast cycle

(3) All the channels are used

-10000 to +10000

0 to +10000 (1)

MAST

FAST

MAST

FAST

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

235

Configuration of analog channels

Module Number of channels

TSX AMZ 600 4 inputs

Display format of the current value

+/- 10 V

0..10V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

2 outputs +/- 10 V

0..10V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

(1) This parameter can not be modified

(2) Only in fast cycle

(3) All the channels are used

Display

-10000 to +10000

0 to +10000 (1)

-10000 to +10000

0 to +10000 (1)

Task assignment

MAST

FAST

Filtering

0..6

MAST

FAST

236

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Configuration of analog channels

Display of Channel Parameters

Introduction to the Screen

This screen shows the module selected and displays its configured parameters. It also gives access to the Modify Parameters function or to the Debug function.

Example of the configuration screen of the 37-22 processor:

TSX 3722 [POSITION 00.2..10]

Configuration

Designation: Processor 3722

Cycle

Normal

Fast

Fallback mode on fault

Fallback to 0

Maintain value

Channe

Used

Channe

10 MAST

Task

MAST

Task

Symbol

Range

0..10 V

Range

0..10 V

Scale

%..

Filter

Zone 1

Zone 2

Note: If there is no mouse, pressing the <Shift><F2> keys allows you to switch between zone 3 and zone 4.

This bar shows the catalog reference and the position of the module in the PLC.

In the case of an integrated interface, the information displayed is the PLC reference

(TSX 37-22) and the channel address: 0.2 to 0.10.

This command zone shows the current function ( Configuration function) and allows you to choose the Debug function via a drop-down list box.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

237

Configuration of analog channels

Zone 3 This "module" level zone contains the short title of the module (for example: 4 analog outputs +/- 10V) and in certain cases provides additional information, such as: l For the TSX AEZ 801 / 802 input modules and for the interface integrated in the

TSX 37-22 bases, the input scanning cycle: l l

Normal (by default): the inputs are sampled every 32 ms

Fast : only the inputs declared used are sampled

TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]

Configuration

Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS+ - 10 V

Cycle:

Normal

Fast l For the TSX AEZ 414 module and if a thermocouple range is selected, the cold junction compensation executed: Internal (by default) or External .

TSX AEZ 414 [POSITION 010]

Configuration

Designation: 4 DIFF.ANA.INP.16 BITS

Cold Junction

Internal

External

238 l

In the case of external cold junction, channel 0 is forced after confirmation, in the Pt100 range.

For the output modules or for the interface integrated in the bases TSX 37-22, the output fallback mode in the case of a fault: Fallback to 0 (by default) or Maintain value .

TSX ASZ 200 [POSITION 06]

Configuration

Designation: 2 ANALOG OUTPUTS

Fallback mode on fault

Fallback to 0

Maintain value l For the analog input/output module TSX AMZ 600 the screens are different between the inputs and outputs.

l Inputs:

Normal (by default): the inputs are sampled every 16 ms

Fast : only the inputs declared used are sampled

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Configuration of analog channels

The "channel hardware configuration" gives the slot of the riders to be placed by the user depending on the selected range.

Change of configuration between "inputs" and "outputs" is easy to access via the drop-down menu.

TSX AMZ 600 [POSITION 06]

Configuration

Designation: 4 ANA. INPUTS/2 ANA. OUTPUTS

Cycle:

Normal

Fast

Inputs

Hardware configuration of channels

Expected position of the riders on the module

3 2 1 0 l Outputs: the additional information is: the output fallback mode in the case of a fault: Fallback to 0 (by default) or Maintain value .

Change of configuration between "inputs" and "outputs" is easy to access via the drop-down menu.

TSX AMZ 600 [POSITION 06]

Configuration

Designation: 4 ANA. INPUTS/2 ANA. OUTPUTS

Fallback mode on fault:

Fallback to 0

Maintain value

Outputs

239

Configuration of analog channels

Zone 4 This "channel" level zone shows the parameters configured for each of the used channels of the module. For the unused channels, only the channel number and the l l symbol are displayed.

Details of the different columns:

Channel : number of the input or output channel.

Used : reduces the module cycle time when the fast scanning cycle is selected

(only the used channels are scanned).

l Task : l For the input modules, shows the task into which the inputs are assigned: task

MAST or task FAST (only in fast scanning cycle). When this is possible (in fast scanning cycle), a drop-down list box allows the task to be modified.

Note : The TSX AEZ 414 module inputs are always assigned to the MAST task.

For the output modules, shows the task at the end of which the outputs will be updated: MAST or FAST . A drop-down list box allows this task to be modified.

l l l l

Symbol : symbol defined by the user and associated with the language object of the channel. If the channel has no associated symbol, this field is empty.

Range : current input or output channel range. According to the type of module, l l this may be:

Electric (+/- 10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA)

Thermocouple (of type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U) l Thermostatic probe (Pt100 or Ni1000)

Scale : display format of the current value This may be: l Normalized 0..10000 or +/- 10000 (%..) l User

Filter : value of the filter on the current value: l l l l

0 : no filtering

1 and 2: little filtering

3 and 4: medium filtering

5 and 6: strong filtering

240

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

23.2

Configuration of analog channels

Modifying an input channel’s parameters

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section?

What's in this

Section?

This section contains the different procedures for modifying the parameters of an analog module input channel.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Modification of the Scanning Cycle

Modification of the Task Assigned to the Module Inputs

Modification of the Input Range

Modification of the Display Format

Modification of the Filtering Value

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

241

Configuration of analog channels

Modification of the Scanning Cycle

General

Procedure

The scanning cycle can be modified on a TSX AEZ 801 / 802, AMZ 600 module or on the interface integrated in the TSX 37-22 bases.

These parameters ( Normal / Fast and Used ) can not be modified in online mode, if the application has been transferred into the PLC with their default values (normal cycle and all channels used).

For the TSX AMZ 600, the screen is slightly different but the principle is the same.

To modify the scanning cycle, proceed as follows:

Access the configuration editor.

Select the type of cycle required using the two command buttons: l l

Normal

Fast

Example of a screen for a TSX AEZ 801 (equivalent to the AMZ 600):

TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]

Configuration

Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS + - 10V

Cycle:

Normal

Fast

Channel

Used

MAST

Task Symbol Range

+/-10 V

+/-10 V not used not used

Scale

%..

Filter

3 If the fast cycle is selected, in the Used column check only the used channels.

242

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Configuration of analog channels

Modification of the Task Assigned to the Module Inputs

General

Procedure

This function can only be modified on the TSX AEZ 801 / 802, AMZ 600 modules or on the interface integrated in the TSX 37-22 bases.

For the TSX AMZ 600, the screen is slightly different but the principle is the same.

To modify the task assigned to the inputs, proceed as follows:

Access the configuration editor.

In the drop-down list box click on the Task column:

Example of a screen for a AEZ 801 (equivalent to the AMZ 600):

TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]

Configuration

Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS + - 10V

Cycle:

Normal

Fast

Channel

Used

MAST

Task

MAST

FAST

Symbol Range

+/-10 V

Scale

%..

Filter

3 Select MAST or FAST in the list.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

243

Configuration of analog channels

Modification of the Input Range

Procedure To modify the input range, proceed as follows:

Access the configuration editor.

In the drop-down list box click on the Range column:

Illustration:

Channel

Used

MAST

Task Symbol Range

+/-10 V

Scale

%..

Filter

3 Select the range required in the list.

244

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Configuration of analog channels

Modification of the Display Format

Electric Ranges To modify the display format, proceed as follows:

Access the configuration editor.

Double click in the cell of the channel to be modified in the Scale column or press<Enter> with the cursor positioned on the same cell:

The Channel parameters dialog box appears.

Illustration:

Channel

Used

MAST

Task Symbol Range

+/-10 V

%..

Scale

User

%..

Filter

Scale

-100% ->

View

-100

100% -> 100

4 If the default values are selected, the channel parameters display zone shows %..

In the opposite case (user display), it shows User .

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

245

Configuration of analog channels

Thermal Ranges

(TSX AEZ 414)

To modify the display format, proceed as follows:

Access the configuration editor.

Double click in the cell of the channel to be modified in the Scale column or press

<Enter> with the cursor positioned on the same cell:

The Channel parameters dialog box appears.

Illustration:

Channel

Task

MAST

Symbol Range

Pt100

+/-10 V

Scale

%..

1/10 °C

%..

Filter

Chan. 0 Parameters

Temperature range from Unit

-2000 to 8500 1/10 °C

° C

° F

Scale

Standardized

View

-2000 1/10 °C -> 0

8500 1/10 °C -> 10 000

Select the unit in which the readings are to be displayed (Degrees Celsius or

Fahrenheit) using the two command buttons in the Unit zone.

Then select the display mode in the Scale zone: l l

In temperature:

Standardized:

Standardized

box not checked

box checked

If the standardized display is selected, if necessary, modify one or both display limits.

In this case, the display becomes user standardized.

Close the Channel parameters dialog box to confirm the selections.

l l

If temperature display is selected, the channel parameters display zone shows

10°C or 1/10°F

If the standardized display (default or user) is selected, the channel parameters display zone shows %..

246

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Configuration of analog channels

Modification of the Filtering Value

Procedure To modify the filtering value, proceed as follows:

Access the configuration editor.

In the drop-down list box click on the Filter column.

Illustration:

Channel

Used

MAST

Task Symbol Range

+/-10 V

Scale

User

%..

Filter

Select the filtering value required in the list.

The alpha coefficient value of the selected filter and the associated response time are then displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.

Reminder : In fast scanning cycle, filtering is inhibited on the TSX AEZ 801 /

802, AMZ 600 modules or on the interface integrated in the TSX 37-22 bases.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

247

Configuration of analog channels

23.3 Modifying an output channel’s parameters

At a Glance

Aim of this

Section?

What's in this

Section?

This section contains the different procedures for modifying the parameters of an analog module output channel.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

Modification of the Fallback Mode

Modifying the task to which the output is assigned

Modification of the Output Range (TSX ASZ 200 and TSX AMZ 600)

Page

249

250

251

248

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Configuration of analog channels

Modification of the Fallback Mode

Procedure To modify the fallback mode, proceed as follows:

Access the configuration editor.

Select the fallback mode using the two command buttons.

Example of a screen for a TSX ASZ 401 (equivalent to the AMZ 600):

TSX ASZ 401 [POSITION 06]

Configuration

Designation: 4 ANA.OUTPUTS +/-10V

Fallback mode on fault

Fallback to 0

Maintain value

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

249

Configuration of analog channels

Modifying the task to which the output is assigned

Procedure To modify the task, proceed as follows:

Access the configuration editor.

Choose the task from the pull-down box list.

Illustration:

Channel

0 MAST

Task

1 MAST

FAST

Symbol Range

4..20mA

250

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Configuration of analog channels

Modification of the Output Range (TSX ASZ 200 and TSX AMZ 600)

Procedure To modify the output range, proceed as follows:

Access the configuration editor.

Select the required range in the list in the drop-down list box:

Example of a screen for a TSX ASZ 200 (equivalent to the AMZ 600):

Channel

MAST

Task Symbol Range

4..20mA

+/- 10V

0..20mA

4..20mA

For the TSX AMZ 600 module there is another range: 0..10V.

The new selection appears in the channel parameters display zone.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

251

Configuration of analog channels

252

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Debugging function

At a Glance

Aim of this

Chapter?

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes the Debugging function of the analog modules on the PLC

Micro.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Introduction to the Debugging function

Display of Channel Parameters

Module Diagnostics Display

Deletion of Module Channel Forcing

Display of Detailed Channel Diagnostics

Modification of the Filtering Value

Channel Forcing / Delete Forcing

Page

253

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog debugging

Introduction to the Debugging function

General This debugging function can be accessed for each module from the channel parameters (See

Display of Channel Parameters, p. 237) display screen. This is

only possible if the PLC is in on-line.

The debug screen is displayed: l Either from the pull-down dialog box which is used to alternate access to the parameter Debugging and Configuration functions.

TSX 3722 [POSITION 00.2..10]

Configuration

Désignation : Processeur 3722

Debug

Cycle

Normal

Fast

Fallback mode on failure

Fallback to 0

Maintain value l Or from the View menu in the PL7 Micro software and the Debugging option.

The Debugging function is used to display in on-line mode, the parameters for each of the analog module channels, including the interface built-in to the PLC TSX 37-22.

This function is also used to access diagnostics for the module and selected channel when a fault is present.

254

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog debugging

Display of Channel Parameters

Introduction to the Screen

This screen shows the module selected and displays in real time the value and state of each of its channels. It also gives access to the adjustment of certain channel parameters (forcing of the input or output value, adjustment of the filtering value, etc.).

Example of screen for a TSX AEZ 801:

1 TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]

Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS+ - 10 V

DIAG ...

Global unforcing

Channel

Symbol

F ERR

DIAG...

-42

-58

-84

-26

-11

-53

Value

Filter

Example of screen for a TSX AMZ 600:

TSX AMZ 600 [POSITION 06]

Debugging

Designation: 4 ANA. INPUTS/2 ANA. OUTPUTS

Global unforcing

DIAG ...

Channel

Symbol

Inputs

ERR

DIAG...

500

Value

Filter Range

+/-10V

0..10V

0..20mA

4..20mA

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

255

Analog debugging

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

Zone 4

Zone 5

This bar shows the catalog reference and the position of the module in the PLC.

In the case of an integrated interface, the information displayed is the PLC reference

(TSX 37-22) and the channel address: 0.2 to 0.10.

This command zone shows the current function ( Debug function) and allows you to choose the Configuration function via a drop-down list box.

This "module" level zone contains the short title of the module (for example: 8 analog inputs +/- 10 V). It also offers two command buttons which allow respectively: l Access to the module diagnostics when the module has a fault: this is shown by l the light that is integrated in the diagnostics access button, which turns red.

To globally delete all channel forcing.

This "channel" level zone displays in real time the value and status of each of the module's channels.

l l l l l

Details of the different columns:

Channel : number of the input or output channel.

Symbol : symbol defined by the user and associated with the language object of the channel. If the channel has no associated symbol, this field is empty.

l F : forcing status of the channel: F if the channel is forced or no indication when the channel is not forced.

ERR : channel status: the ERR indication indicates that there is a channel fault.

Value

Filter

: channel value.

: value of the filter on the current value: l l 0 : no filtering l l

1 and 2: little filtering

3 and 4: medium filtering l 5 and 6: strong filtering

Range : range value (only on TSX AMZ 600).

This command zone, only on the TSX AMZ 600 , allows you to choose between inputs and outputs.

256

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog debugging

Module Diagnostics Display

At a Glance When there is a module fault, a certain number of LEDs, which can be accessed in the configuration editor screens, turn red.

l Module position LED at the level of the screen representing it (first configuration editor screen).

l LED integrated in the DIAG command in the "module" level zone.

In addition, pressing the DIAG command button accesses the Module Diagnostics screen which displays the current module faults, classed according to category: internal faults, external faults or other faults.

Illustration for a ASZ 200 (identical for other modules):

Configuration

TSX 3722 V1.5...

XMWI

XTI..

m p c o g e t a

A n a

0 1 3 5 7

TSX

3722

DMZ DMZ

28AR

Chan

Symbol

AEZ

801

ASZ

200

DIAG ...

Global unforcing

6 8

ERR

DIAG.

Value

DIAG.

Other faults

Faulty channel(s)

Fault display

indicators red

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

257

Analog debugging

List of Module

Faults l l l l

List of module faults that can appear during diagnostics:

Module failure

Faulty channel(s)

Configuration fault

Module missing or switched off

Note: In the event of a configuration fault or missing module, access to the module diagnostics screen is not possible. In this case the following message appears on the screen: "The module is missing or different from the one configured to this position".

258

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog debugging

Deletion of Module Channel Forcing

Procedure To delete forcing of the channels of a module, proceed as follows:

Access the Module debug screen.

Click on the Global unforcing button:

Example of a screen for a TSX AEZ 801 (equivalent to the AMZ 600):

TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]

Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS+ - 10 V

Global unforcing

DIAG ...

3 The forcing of all forced channels is deleted.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

259

Analog debugging

Display of Detailed Channel Diagnostics

At a Glance When a channel has a fault, the DIAG command button associated with this channel in the ERR column turns red.

Pressing the DIAG command button then accesses a Channel Diagnostics screen

(identical to the one for Module Diagnostics) which shows the channel faults, classified according to category: internal faults, external faults or other faults.

Illustration:

TSX ASZ 200 [POSITION 06]

Designation: 2 ANALOG OUTPUTS

Chan

Symbol

DIAG ...

Global unforcing

F ERR

DIAG.

Value

Channel Diagnostics

Internal faults External faults

24 V power supply fault

Other faults

Forced channel

List of Channel

Faults l l l l l l

List of channel faults that can appear during diagnostics:

Sensor link fault

Range overshoot fault

Configuration fault

Application fault

Forced channel

Supply fault 24V (for TSX AEZ 414 and TSX AMZ 600 outputs).

260

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog debugging

Modification of the Filtering Value

Procedure To modify the filtering value, proceed as follows:

Access the Module debugging screen.

Double click on the line of the channel to be modified to bring up the Channel

Adjust window.

Select a filter value from the list in the Filtering drop-down list dialog box.

Illustration:

Channel

Symbol F ERR Value Filter

-26

-11

-16

-47

-37

-63

-84

Adjust Channel 2

Filtering

DIAG...

-100000 to 10000

Forcing

Force

Unforce

4 Confirm by closing.

Note:

Whatever the scanning cycle (normal or fast), modification of filtering is not possible on an unused channel (TSX AEZ 801 / 802, AMZ 600 and interface integrated in bases TSX 37-22).

For the used channels, modification of filtering is also impossible in fast cycle.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

261

Analog debugging

Channel Forcing / Delete Forcing

Procedure To force or delete forcing of a channel, proceed as follows:

Access the Module debugging screen.

Double click on the line of the channel to be modified to bring up the Channel

Adjust window.

262

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Analog debugging

Enter a value in the Forcing entry field.

Illustration for a TSX AEZ 801:

TSX AEZ 801 [POSITION 05]

Designation: 8 ANA. INPUTS+ - 10 V

Channel

Symbol

DIAG ...

Global unforcing

ERR

DIAG..

Value

-25

2000

1000

-47

-42

-58

-79

Filter

Display

Range +/-10V

-100000 to 10000

Forcing

2000 Force

Unforce

Illustration for a TSX AMZ 600:

TSX AMZ 600 [POSITION

Debugging

Designation: 4 ANA. INPUTS/2 ANA. OUTPUTS

DIAG ...

Global unforcing

Channel Symbol

Inputs

ERR

DIAG...

500

Value Filter

Adjust Channel 1

Display

Range 0..10V

0 to 10000

Range

+/-10V

0..10V

0..20mA

4..20mA

Forcing

15 Force

Unforce

Filtering

0 Confirm

263

Analog debugging

Press the Force command button to force the selected channel.

The information F appears in the cell in the F column that corresponds to the forced channel.

To delete forcing, select the channel and press the Unforce command button.

Forcing an Input When an analog input is forced, the value present at the input is not available . The forced value is shown in the screen's Values and Forcing fields.

Forcing of inputs is active whether the PLC is in RUN or STOP.

Whatever the scanning cycle (normal or fast), forcing of inputs is not possible on an unused channel (TSX AEZ 801 / 802, TSX AMZ 600 and interface integrated in bases TSX 37-22).

Forcing an

Output

When an analog output is forced, the value present at the module output is shown in the screen's Forcing field. The value calculated by the application remains displayed in the screen's Value field.

Forcing of outputs is only valid if the PLC is in RUN.

264

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Bits and words associated with the analog application

At a Glance

Subject of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the bits and words associated with the analog application on PLC Micro.

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

Implicit exchange objects associated with the analog application

Explicit Exchange Objects Associated with Inputs/Outputs

Configuration objects associated with the analog application

Page

266

267

269

265

TLX DS 37 PL7 xx

analog bits and words

Implicit exchange objects associated with the analog application

At a Glance These are objects used for programming and diagnostics of analog modules.

These objects are exchanged automatically on each task cycle in which the channels of the module or the built-in interface are configured.

Channel values The following table gives the words containing the analog channel values:

Address

%IWx.i

%QWx.i

Function

Value of input channel i of the analog input module in position x.

(For inputs integrated into the TSX 37-22 basic module, x = 0 and i is between 2 and 9).

Value of output channel i of the analog output module in position x.

(For the output integrated into the TSX 37-22 base module, x =

0 and i = 10).

Example: the word %IW5.3 contains the value present in input 3 of the module in position 5.

Error bit objects The following table gives the error bits:

Address

%Ix.i.ERR

%Ix.MOD.ERR

Meaning

When set to 1, indicates that the input channel i of the module in position x is faulty.

When set to 1, indicates that the module in position x is faulty.

266

TLX DS 37 PL7 xx

analog bits and words

Explicit Exchange Objects Associated with Inputs/Outputs

General

Internal Words

These objects are exchanged via instructions. They are only useful for advanced programming of the application-specific function.

Table of words available according to the different types of module:

Address

%MWx.MOD.2

%MWx.i

%MWx.i.1

%MWx.i.2

%MWx.i.7

Meaning Built-in analog

Module status word Yes

Exchange in progress Yes

Exchange report

Channel status word

Adjustment (Filtering coefficient)

Yes

Input modules

Yes

Output modules

Yes

Details of the explicit exchange words

Analog module x status word:

Address

%MWx.MOD.2:X0

%MWx.MOD.2:X1

%MWx.MOD.2:X2

%MWx.MOD.2:X3

%MWx.MOD.2:X4

%MWx.MOD.2:X5

%MWx.MOD.2:X6

%MWx.MOD.2:X7 to 15

Meaning (when = 1)

Module failure

Faulty channel(s)

Reserved

Self-testing in progress

Reserved

Configuration fault

Module missing or switched off

Reserved

Channel i status word

Address

%MWx.i.2:X0

%MWx.i.2:X1

%MWx.i.2:X2

%MWx.i.2:X3

%MWx.i.2:X4

%MWx.i.2:X5

Meaning (when = 1)

Sensor link fault

Range overshoot fault

Reserved

24 V power supply fault (output modules and output channels of mixed analog modules)

Module failure

Configuration fault

TLX DS 37 PL7 xx

267

analog bits and words

Address

%MWx.i.2:X6

%MWx.i.2:X7

%MWx.i.2:X8

%MWx.i.2:X9 to 12

%MWx.i.2:X13

%MWx.i.2:X14 and 15

Meaning (when = 1)

Communication fault

Adjustment parameter value outside limits

Channels not ready (module initialization in progress)

Reserved

Forced channel

Reserved

268

TLX DS 37 PL7 xx

analog bits and words

Configuration objects associated with the analog application

At a Glance

Constant words

These are the objects which can only be accessed in read format and which contain the configuration parameters.

Table of constant words available according to the different types of module:

Address

%KWx.i.0

%KWx.i.1

%KWx.i.2

Meaning Analog builtin

Yes Channel parameters defined at configuration

Minimal scale values defined at configuration

Maximum scale values defined at configuration

Input modules

Yes

Output modules

Yes

Details of word

%KW.x.i.0

Command word for the input channels:

Address

%KWx.0:X0 to X5

Meaning

Range of use coded on 6 bits:

00 0000 = reserved

00 0001 = 4-20 mA or Thermocouple B

00 0010 = 0-20 mA or Thermocouple E

00 0011 = Thermocouple J

00 0100 = Thermocouple K

00 0101 = Thermocouple N

00 0110 = Thermocouple R

00 0111 = 1-5 V or Thermocouple S

00 1000 = Thermocouple T

00 1001 = 5 V or Thermocouple U

00 1010 = 10 V or Thermocouple L

00 1011 to 01 1111 = reserved

10 0000 = Pt100

10 0010 = reserved

10 0010 = Ni1000

10 0011 to 11 1101 = reserved

11 1110 = discrete range

11 1111 = reserved

TLX DS 37 PL7 xx

269

analog bits and words

Address

%KWx.0:X6

%KWx.0:X7

%KWx.0:X8

%KWx.0:X9

%KWx.0:X10

%KWx.0:X11

%KWx.0:X12

%KWx.0:X13

%KWx.0:X14 and X15

Meaning

Polarity: l if electrical range:

0 = unipolar, 1 = bipolar l if temperature range:

0 = °C, 1 = °F

Type of range:

0 = electrical, 1 = temperature

Scanning cycle

0 = normal, 1 = fast

Channel used

0 = normal, 1 = fast not used

Not used

Cold junction compensation:

0 = internal, 1 = external

(only on TSX AEZ 414)

Scale:

0 = manufacturer, 1 = user

Not used

Command word for the output channels:

Address

%KWx.0:X0 to X5

%KWx.0:X6

%KWx.0:X7

%KWx.0:X8

%KWx.0:X9 and X10

%KWx.0:X11

%KWx.0:X12 to X15

Meaning

Output range coded on 6 bits:

00 0000 = reserved

00 0001 = 4-20 mA

00 0010 = 0-20 mA

00 0011 to 00 1001 = reserved

00 1010 = 10 V

00 1011 to 11 1111 = reserved

Polarity:

0 = unipolar, 1 = bipolar

Reserved

Fallback mode

0 = fallback, 1 = maintain

Reserved

270

TLX DS 37 PL7 xx

Operator Dialog functions

Introduction

Aim of this part

What's in this part?

This part introduces the specific built-in Operator Dialog functions of PL7 and describes the software setup.

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter

Chaptername

General presentation of the Operator Dialog functions

Built-in DOP functions

Appendices

Page

273

275

329

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

271

Operator Dialog functions

272

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General presentation of the

Operator Dialog functions

General presentation

Introduction The PL7 software allows the implementation of specific functions, designed to simplify the use of an operator dialog terminal (version 2.0 and higher) on a Micro

PLC.

These functions are the basic elements of the PL7 language.

They allow the following actions to be carried out without referring to the l l l communication media between the command console CCX 17 and the PLC: displaying messages, displaying message and alarm message groups, entering values from the PLC program.

Hence the Operator Dialog functions are completely integrated in the PLC l l l l l application and support: data cohesion, unique saving, easy maintenance, simplified consoles.

...

The processing of these functions occurs asynchronously to the processing of the operative task that enabled their activation.

How to access a

DOP function

See

Accessing a specific function, method or procedure type instruction, p. 53.

273

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General presentation

Conditions for using built-in

DOP functions

Example of a

DOP function

The built-in DOP functions require a program space of 1 Kword (4.7 Kwords for

ADJUST). Variables must be reserved for the data you want to display (use the constants %KWi).

The illustration below shows an example of a DOP function written in the different

PL7 languages using the assisted entry of the library functions.

PANEL-CMD

Parameters

Console address:

Data to Send:

%MW0

%KW40

Commands

Clear

Screen

Entry log

Alarm log

Alarm management

Cancel an Alarm

Line

Clear

Report:

Line number

Alarm number

%MW100 4

OK Cancel

LD Language

%M100 %MW100>> OPERATE

PANEL_CMD (ADR#0.0.4, %KW0:2, %MW>>

IL Language

LDN

ANDN

%100

%MW100:X0

[PANEL_CMD (ADR#0.0.4, %KW0:2, %MW0: 4 ) ]

ST Language

IF NOT %M100 AND NOT %MW100. X0 THEN PANEL_CND (%MW0 . 6,%KV0 . 2,%MW100 . 4),

END_-F

274

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Introduction

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes the different built-in DOP functions and shows how they are set-up in PL7.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

27.1

27.2

Topic

Description of the parameters common to the different DOP functions

Description of the built-in DOP functions

Page

276

291

275

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

27.1 Description of the parameters common to the different DOP functions

Introduction

Aim of this section

This section shows the main parameters, divided into zones, of the built-in DOP functions.

Note: The parameters specific to a DOP function are shown at the level of the function concerned.

What's in this

Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

General

Parameters Zone: Terminal address

Parameters field: Data to be sent

Parameter field: Data to be received:

Parameters field: Report

Message field

Field zone

Page

276

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

General

Introduction

Illustration

The Built-in DOP functions are part of the procedure category; they do not return value, but they do possess several parameters, some of which have to be filled in.

The functions use three types of parameters: l l l in read only (IN) format, acknowledged at the start of function execution, in write only (OUT) format, set at close of function execution, in read and write format (IN/OUT), whose contents have been acknowledged at the start of function execution and are then updated by the function results.

The parameter type is displayed in the Type of Parameter of the … column located in the Library functions screen.

The illustration below gives an insight into the Library functions screen where the various parameters of the selected function are displayed.

PL7: Library functions

Function information: Parameters Detail...

Family Lib.V.

App.V

Dates, Times, and Periods2.10

Diagnostics

Integrated DOP

Explicit exchanges

1.01

3.03 3.03

1.00

Call format

Name

ADJUST

ASK_MSG

ASK_VALUE

ASSIGN_K

PROCEDURE parameter:

Name Type

ADR AR_W

DATA AR_W

VAL AR_W

Kind

Comment

CCX17 address table

Table for data to be sent

OUT Table for data to be received

Comment

Read/write memory objects and I/O

Variable blocking entry on CCX

Variable blocking entry on >>

Dynamic key assignment >>

Entry field

Call display

ASK_MSG( )

OK Cancel

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

277

Built-in DOP functions

Parameters Zone: Terminal address

At a Glance

Addressing in words or constants

This parameter contains the access path (addressing) of the CCX 17 interface terminal.

This path can be either: l l located in a table of six internal words (%MW), located in a table of six internal constants (%MW), l entered directly as an immediate value in the form of an ADR# operator.

ADR# is thus assimilated into a table of six internal consecutive words.

The table below gives the meaning of the different words composing the terminal address.

Word number

%MWi / %KWi

%MWi +1 / %KWi+1

%MWi +2 / %KWi+2

%MWi +3 / %KWi+3

%MWi +4 / %KWi+4

%MWi +5 / %KWi+5

Description

Most significant

6 (Uni-telway)

254 (1)

Module number

CCX 17 address

SYS

Least significant

0 (1)

0 channel

Key

(1) CCX 17 terminal operation only authorizes one intra-station address. Consequently, the {Network.Station} pair systematically takes the value {0.254}.

Writing to this field is optional.

Uni-telway

Addressing

Note: The keyword SYS (value 254) corresponds to addressing the system channel (UNI-TE server) as a communication channel.

Addressing for a CCX 17 connected to the Uni-telway bus takes the following form:

ADR#{<Network>.<Station>}<module>.<channel>.<CCX 17 address> ,

ADR#{<Network>.<Station>}<module>.<channel>.SYS

ADR#<module>.<channel>.<CCX 17 address> ,

ADR#<module>.<channel>.SYS.

278

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Addressing examples

If you are using: in the function entry Help screen, … internal words (or constants)

Example:

Parameters

Terminal address: %MW0 6

ADR syntax

A CCX 17 slave at address UTW 4-5 connected to a master Micro PLC via the

Uni-telway integrated link (channel 0).

An address can be entered in several ways (example using the internal words

%MW0 to %MW5):

Example: you must enter the program …

%MW0:=16#0600;

%MW1:=16#FE00;

%MW2:=16#0000;

%MW3:=16#0400;

%MW4:=16#0000;

%MW5:=16#0000; or

%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;

Parameters

Terminal address: ADR#0.0.4

FONCTION_DOP(ADR#0.0.4,...

Note: When using constants, you must first initialize the %KW0:6 table in the Data editor, by successively assigning the %KWis of which it is composed.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

279

Built-in DOP functions

Parameters field: Data to be sent

Introduction

Locating items within the PLC application

Data to be sent is individual to each type of MMI function.

The data can be found either in the PLC application, or in the CCX 17 when it has its own application.

In the case where data is to be found in the PLC application, it can be sent from: l l a table of internal words (%MW), a table of internal constants (%KW).

The table below shows the structure of data sent in this way.

Role Word number

4, 5, ...

Contains a contains a marker for value 16#CC17, and has a double role: l it allows the Help screen to identify a correct message and to redisplay the values on the entry screen in order to help modify or display default values.

l it allows the function being carried out to check that the table received does actually contain a message for a CCX 17. In fact, it is possible to call an

Integrated DOP function in a program without going via the Help/Control screens.

In the case of an unmarked message, the function can immediately return an error back to the application without sending unreliable data to the console.

Contains the command number.

Contains the length of data to be sent.

Contains the data to be sent.

Note: For reasons of efficiency, the <Data to be sent> parameter can be programmed using %KWi constants. In this way the software automatically initializes this data field with adequate values.

Selecting %MW bars access to different fields in the entry help box for integrated

DOP functions. It is then necessary to establish, either manually or by program, the contents of the data to be sent (see PL7 MMI 17 software documentation).

280

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Location in a

CCX 17 with application

Built-in DOP functions

When data is in a CCX 17, the data to be sent is limited to DOP function execution commands.

This data can be sent from the PLC application: l l from a table of internal words (%MW), from a table of internal constants (%KW), l directly using an immediate integer value.

The table above shows data structure when using a table.

Role

Word number

Contains a command number

Contains the data to be sent to the console.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

281

Built-in DOP functions

Parameter field: Data to be received:

Introduction This parameter only affects functions ASK_MSG and ASK_VALUE .

The data is located in an %MWi internal word table (length 2 table maximum).

Note: By operating the MMI console, the Data to be received parameter contains the value entered. If the status message variable is different from the data to be received, it is not changed by the entry. It only affects the display on the CCX 17.

282

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Parameters field: Report

Introduction The report contains the parameters for managing asynchronous communication functions.

It is common to all integrated DOP functions.

Report structure The report uses a table of four internal words (%MW) containing different parameters such as: l l information on function activity, the exchange number which identifies the transaction in progress (useful when using the CANCEL communication function), l the exchange report split into two feedback codes: l l l l the communication level, the operation level, the value of the timeout which is used to monitor absent responses, the number of bytes to be sent and/or the number of bytes received.

The table below show the structure of the report.

Least significant byte Report management Word number Most significant byte

%MWi

%MWi+1

Exchange number

Operation report

%MWi+2

%MWi+3

Timeout

Length

Bit 0: activity bit System

Communication report System

User

System

%MWi:X0 activity bit

This bit indicates the state of the application of the communication function.

It is set on 1 when the function starts and falls back to 0 when a response is received, at the end of a timeout, or if the operation is cancelled (CANCEL function).

Exchange number

While a function is being sent, the system automatically assigns it a number which is used to identify the exchange.

This number serves as a reference to stop the exchange in progress, if necessary

(on using CANCEL).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

283

Built-in DOP functions

Communication report

The communication report provides information on the communication aspect of the transaction.

This report is significant when the value of the activity bit changes from 1 to 0.

Note: The communication report does not affect the ADJUST function.

16#0005

16#xx06

16#0007

16#0008

16#0009

16#000A

16#000B

16#xx14

16#00FF

The different values of this report are indicated in the following table:

Value

16#xx00

16#0001

16#0002

16#0003

16#0004

Significance of the communication report (least significant byte)

Successful exchange

Stopping the exchange via a timeout

Stopping the exchange on user request (CANCEL function)

Incorrect address format (length is other than 6)

Incorrect destination address (addresses unauthorized for the CCX 17, e.g.: addresses being broadcast)

Invalid report

Specific parameters are invalid (particularly those concerning data to be sent)

Destination missing

Reserved

Size of reception buffer is insufficient

Size of transmission buffer is insufficient

System resources missing (communication saturation)

Negative response from the CCX 17 or from the PLC (ADJUST function)

Message refused (the CCX 17 is not in a state where it can process it)

Note: The function can detect an error in the parameters before activating the exchange. In this case the activity bit remains 0, the report is initialized with the values corresponding to the fault.

284

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Operation report The operation report details the result of the operation on the remote application.

It is significant if the communication report has the following values: l l l

16#00,

16#06,

16#14 (except for the ADJUST function).

In other cases, the operation report is worth 0.

The different values of this report are indicated in the following table:

Communication report

(least significant byte)

Significance of the operation report

16#0000

16#1006

Generic positive result

Number of management words below 24

16#1106

16#1206

16#1306

16#1406

Non-existent type object to be read (greater than 8)

Inconsistency between bits RDEC and SINC

Invalid value to be written

Broadcast address (ALL) prohibited

16#6506

16#6606

16#6706

16#6806

16#6906

16#FF06

16#0114

16#0214

16#0414

16#0814

16#1414

16#1514

16#2014

{network.station} pair different from {0.254}

Data to be sent does not have a 16#CC17 marker

Invalid size of data to be sent

Invalid CCX 17 response

Length of "Data to be received" is insufficient

CCX 17 link inoperational

Command not recognized

Command queue capacity has been exceeded

Size of command is less that the minimum required size

Command refused because application transfer in progress

Inaccessible object

System error

Incorrect data

Integrated DOP functions

All

ADJUST only

All except ADJUST

ADJUST only

All except ADJUST

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

285

Built-in DOP functions

Timeout Timeout determines the maximum waiting time for a response. The time base for this parameter is 100 ms.

value 0 corresponds to an infinite wait value. In this case, the CANCEL function should be used.

Note: Value 0 is mandatory for functions ASK_MSG and ASK_VALUE .

If the timeout period has elapsed, the exchange terminates with an error report

(value 1). Similarly, the system refuses any response received at the end of the timeout.

Example

Start function

End of timeout

Activity bit = 0

Report = 1

Activity bit = 1

Timeout activation

Report set to zero

Allocation of exchange number

Receive response

Activity bit = 0

Stop timeout

Report update

Length

Note: The timeout value of a communication function must be sufficient to guarantee receiving a response to the question asked. This time period depends on the type of network and on the load in effect at the moment of the transaction.

The length parameter is used to store the number of bytes received after receiving a message for functions ASK_MSG and ASK_VALUE.

For the other functions, this parameter is worth 0.

286

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Message field

Introduction

Message text

The message field groups together the different elements that make up the data to l l l be displayed on the CCX 17 screen.

These elements are: the message text, the different display attributes (position, size, etc.).

the message print command via the CCX 17.

This field is used to enter the message text that is to be displayed on the CCX 17 console.

The length of the message is 40 characters max.

The table below details the types of characters authorized.

Characters Comments

ASCII code above 32 (20h) Characters that can be displayed directly or by a combination of the and keys.

The _ sign (underscore) This character is reserved by the system to specify the optional display field for the variable associated with the message.

To specify the position of the variable field, the character must be entered in the appropriate place. The system then automatically calculates the number of necessary for the length of the variable display.

Print

Overprint

Line

This parameter orders the command console to print a message when it appears on the console screen.

This parameter refers to alarm messages only. Enabling this parameter overprints the alarm message as soon as it appears.

This parameter specifies the line where the message must be displayed.

Position

Minimum

Default

Maximum

Value

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

287

Built-in DOP functions

Column This parameter specifies the column where the first message character is positioned.

Position

Minimum

Default

Maximum

Automatic (1)

Value(s)

Left, Centered, Right

Key

(1) This mode can be accessed by selecting automatic mode. It is local to the function.

Attributes

Size

Clear l l l

This parameter sets the attributes of the message display.

The different modes are:

Normal (when no check box has been selected),

Flashing,

Reverse video.

l l

This parameter specifies the format of all the text characters or the variable to be displayed.

Possible options are:

Standard,

Double.

This field is used to associate a single command that has been executed with a message before the message has been displayed. l l l

Options are:

None (no command is associated with a message),

Line (clears the line on which the message is to be displayed),

Screen (completely clears the screen).

Note: If no variable has been associated with a message, this command does not run (so use the PANEL_CMD function).

288

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Field zone

Introduction

Field type

Symbol

Address

Comment

The Field zone is used to set the different parameters for the object which is l l l associated with a message.

These parameters are: the type of object, the display format,

...

This parameter sets the type of object which is associated with a message.

The length of the message is 40 characters max.

The table below shows the different object types possible.

Type of object

None

Address

Date

Time

Description

No field is associated with the message displayed.

The object associated with the message is a variable.

The message is correlated to the current PLC date.

The message is correlated to the current PLC time.

This parameter specifies the symbol of the variable associated with the message. It must be set in the station database. The address associated with this symbol is automatically taken into account on confirming the screen.

Note: In the case of a TSX Agent connected to the FIPIO bus, the variable is read in the bus master PLC, and not in the function sender PLC.

This parameter specifies the address of the variable associated with the message. l l l

When a symbol is associated with the variable, it is automatically taken into account.

Authorized objects can be: internal bits (%Mi), internal words (%MWi), double internal words (%MDi).

This field displays the variable comment for viewing. This comment is set in the application data editor.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

289

Built-in DOP functions

Refresh

Display format

This function specifies whether the variable contained in the message should be periodically refreshed while being displayed (function is active be default).

This parameter specifies the variable display format.

The table below shows the different formats available.

Format

ASCII

Numerical

Associated parameters

Signed (1)

Number of digits before the decimal point (1),

Number of digits after the decimal point (1),

Key

(1) these associated parameters can be accessed by clicking on the Modify button.

Note: From the parameters chosen, the software automatically calculates the display format.

290

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

27.2

Built-in DOP functions

Description of the built-in DOP functions

Introduction

Aim of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section describes the different built-in DOP functions.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

List of the built-in DOP functions

SEND_MSG function

GET_MSG function

ASK_MSG function

SEND_ALARM function

DISPLAY_MSG function

DISPLAY_GRP function

DISPLAY_ALRM function

ASK_VALUE function

GET_VALUE function

CONTROL_LEDS function

ASSIGN_KEYS function

PANEL_CMD function

ADJUST function

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

291

Built-in DOP functions

List of the built-in DOP functions

Introduction The built-in DOP functions make it possible to: l control the main functions of a CCX 17 console not containing an application (this has been neither configured nor loaded by the external design software).

l command a CCX 17 console containing an application created with the MMI17

WIN or PL7 M17 OS/2 products.

The table below shows the various built-in DOP functions.

Function

SEND_MSG

GET_MSG

ASK_MSG

SEND_ALARM

DISPLAY_MSG

DISPLAY_GRP

DISPLAY_ALRM

ASK_VALUE

GET_VALUE

Description

Displaying status messages contained in the PLC memory on CCX 17 with or without variable.

Free entry (asynchronous) of PLC variable values associated with status messages.

Application

Witho ut

With

Blocking entry (synchronous) of a PLC variable value associated with status messages.

Displaying alarm messages contained in the PLC memory.

Displaying a status message contained in the memory of the CCX17.

Displaying a group of status messages contained in the CCX17 memory.

Displaying an alarm message contained in the CCX17 memory.

Blocking entry (synchronous) of values for the PLC variables associated with a status message contained in the CCX17 memory.

Free entry (asynchronous) of values for the PLC variables associated with a status message contained in the CCX17 memory.

CONTROL_LEDS Controlling the CCX 17 LEDs and relays.

ASSIGN_KEYS Configuring the CCX 17 command keys.

PANEL_CMD

ADJUST

Sending a generic command.

Language object adjustment.

292

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

SEND_MSG function

Role

Implementation

Application example

This function is used to display a message with a dynamic variable (if necessary) on a CCX 17 console screen.

Implementation of the SEND_MSG function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

The example given below makes use of the SEND_MSG function to display two status messages on the screen of a T CCX 1720 W console without an application.

This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).

Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 with application, is shown using the

DISPLAY_GRP function.

Application description Variables used l l

The aim of this example is, after setting application to RUN (%S13 =1): l initializing the PLC variables, l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, l conditions of execution, clearing the console screen (see PANEL_CMD function), to display status messages on the console screen: l Manu and Auto (standard format, positioned on line 1, Column 1), l l Four 4 (double format, automatic centering, Line 4), storing the function display execution.

%MW0:6: console address

%KW0:x: message 1 data to send

%KW40:x: message 2 data to send

%MW100:4: report

%MW100:X0: activity bit

%MW102: timeout

%M100:2: conditions of activation,

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

293

Built-in DOP functions

Introduction to the console

Manu Auto

Four 4

Fixed messages

Program corresponding to the application

( * INIT console address, condition, timeout

IF %S1.3 THEN

%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;

%MW102:=500;

%M100:2:=0;

END_IF;

(*Write Auto, Manu and Four4 messages*)

IF NOT %M100 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

SEND_MSG(%MW0:6,%KW0:28,%MW100:4);

SET %M100;

END_IF;

IF NOT %M101 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

SEND_MSG(%MW0:6,%KW0:28,%MW100:4);

SET %M101;

END_IF;

Entry help screens corresponding to the application:

SEND_MSG

Parameters

Console address:

Data to Send:

%MW0

%KW0

Message

Text: Manu Auto

Position

Mode

Manual

Line 1 Column

Column alignment

Auto Left Centered Right

Report:

Attributes

Flashing

Clear

None

Field

Field type

None Address Date

Symbol:

Comment:

Display format

Address:

%MW100 4

Size

Standard

Double

Parameters

Line

Data to Send:

Message

Text: Time Four 4

Position

Mode

Update

Manual

Auto

Modify

%MW0

%KW40

Line

Column alignment

Left

4 Column

Centered Right

Report: %MW100 4

Attributes

Flashing

Reverse video

Size

Standard

Double

Clear

None Line Scree

OK Cancel Field

Field type

None Address

Address:

Date Time

Update Symbol:

Comment:

Display format

Modify

OK Cancel

294

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

GET_MSG function

Role This function is used to display, on the screen of a CCX 17 console, a message with a variable which can be modified by the operator.

The entry is made in multiple mode. The operator thus has the possibility of entering several variables successively, and the PLC program processes the entered value when the variable appears.

Implementation Implementation of the GET_MSG function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

Specific parameter: Value

The Value parameter specifies the characteristics of the value which is associated to the variable.

If the choice is… The value…

Not checked entry on the CCX 17 console keyboard is free (1).

Limited

Increment entry on the CCX 17 console keyboard must be within the limits defined by the Min and Max values in the Entry field in order to be taken into account by the application (1).

display on the CCX 17 console screen is incremented or decremented from the value of the increment (1).

Key

(1) The value or the increment entered on the CCX 17 console keyboard follows the display format (e.g.: 9999.99), this determines the whole parts and decimal parts authorized by the user entry.

Example of application

The example given below makes use of the GET_MSG function to display a status message containing a variable which can be modified on the screen of a T CCX

1720 W console without application.

This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).

Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 with application, is shown using the

GET_VALUE function.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

295

Built-in DOP functions

Application description Variables used

Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a table of words, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,

Application: The aim of this example is, on user request: l to display a status message on the console screen: l Temperature = xxx °C (standard format, automatic centering,

Line 6, variable with attributes: increment of 50, three-digit integer, l periodic refreshing), storing the function execution.

%MW0:6: console address

%KW80:x: data to be sent.

%MW100:4: report

%MW100:X0: activity bit

%MW102: timeout

%M102: activation condition

%MW10: Temperature variable

Introduction to the console

Message displayed on user request

Temperature = xxx °C

Program corresponding to the application

( * INIT console address, condition, timeout

IF %S1.3 THEN

%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;

%MW102:=500;

%M102:=0;

END_IF;

(* Write message Temp… *)

IF NOT %M102 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

GET_MSG(%MW0:6,%KW100:28,%MW100:4);

SET %M102;

END_IF;

296

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Entry help screen corresponding to the application:

GET_MSG

Parameters

Console address:

Data to Send:

%MW0

%KW1000 34

Message

Text: Temperature=____°C

Position

Mode

Manual

Line 6 Column

Column alignment

Auto Left

Centered Right

Report:

Attributes

Flashing

%MW100

Reverse video

Size

Standard

Double

Field

Symbol:

Comment:

Display format

Entry

Value

Not Checked

Address:

Limited

%MV10

999

Update

Modify

Increment

Increment: 50

Ok Cancel

297

Built-in DOP functions

ASK_MSG function

Role

Implementation

This function is used to display, on the screen of a CCX 17 console, a message with a variable which can be modified by the operator.

The entry is made in synchronized mode. Therefore, it is possible to make one single operator entry at each message display.

Implementation of the ASK_MSG function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

Note: It is strongly advisable to assign parameters for the timeout for an infinite period (see

Parameters field: Report, p. 283 so as not to invalidate the ASK_MSG

function before the operator entry is made.

Specific parameter: Value

The Value parameter specifies the characteristics of the value which is associated to the variable.

If the choice is… The value…

Not checked entry on the CCX 17 console keyboard is free (1).

Limited

Increment entry on the CCX 17 console keyboard must be within the limits defined by the Min and Max values in the Entry field in order to be taken into account by the application (1).

display on the CCX 17 console screen is incremented or decremented from the value of the increment (1).

Key

(1) The value or the increment entered on the CCX 17 console keyboard follows the display format (e.g.: 9999.99), this determines the whole parts and decimal parts authorized by the user entry.

298

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Example

Built-in DOP functions

The illustration below shows an example of ASK_MSG function entry.

ASK_MSG

Parameters

Console address:

Data to Send:

ADR#,LL0.1.7,SYS

%KW20 34

Message

Text: ASK MSG:_

Position

Mode

Manual

Line 5 Column

Column alignment

Auto Left

Centered Right

Data to receive:

Report:

Attributes

Flashing

%KW200

%KW10

Reverse video

Size

Standard

Double

Field

Symbol:

Comment:

Display format

Entry

Value

Not Checked

Address:

Limited

%MV100

Modify

Increment

Ok Cancel

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

299

Built-in DOP functions

SEND_ALARM function

Role This function is used to activate, on the screen of a CCX 17 console, an alarm message present in the PLC.

Note: Alarm messages are always displayed on the second line of the screen

( Superimpose parameter activated). They are dated and timed by the console which synchronizes them with the PLC clock.

Implementation Implementation of the SEND_ALARM function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

Note: It is imperative that the associated message in the CCX 17 console is deactivated on the disappearance of the alarm in the PLC (see function

PANEL_CMD), in order to enable a potential new activation of this alarm.

Specific parameter:

Alarm number

The Alarm number parameter defines the alarm message identifier.

Its value is between 900 and 999.

300

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Example of application

Built-in DOP functions

The example given below makes use of the SEND_ALARM function to display an alarm message on the screen of a T CCX 1720 W console without application.

This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).

Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 with application, is shown using the

DISPLAY_ALARM function.

Application description Variables used

Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a table of words, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,

Application: The aim of this example is: l l to detect overshoot of a temperature threshold (500 °C), to display an alarm message on the console screen: l Overheat four = xxx °C (standard format, automatic setting imposed by the function, variable with attributes: increment of 50, l three-digit integer), storing the function execution.

%MW0:6: console address

%KW80:x: data to be sent.

%MW100:4: report

%MW100:X0: activity bit

%MW102: timeout

%M103: activation condition

%MW10: Temperature variable

Introduction to the console

System display Alarm message

*ALARM*

Oven overheating = xxx °C

Program corresponding to the application

( *INIT console address, condition, timeout

IF %S1.3 THEN

%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;

%MW102:=500;

%M103:=0;

END_IF;

(*Time overrun control*)

IF %MW10>500 THEN

SET %M12;

ELSE RESET %M12;

END_IF;

(* Write Surch alarm message… *)

IF %M12 AND NOT %M103 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

SEND_ALARM(%MW0:6,%KW0:27,%MW100:4);

SET %M103;

END_IF;

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

301

Built-in DOP functions

Entry help screen corresponding to the application:

SEND_ALARM

Parameters

Console address:

Data to be sent:

%MW0

%KW120

Message

Text: Oven overheating = ____°C

Alarm number: 901

Size

Standard

Field

Symbol:

Comment:

Display format

Report:

Double

%MW110

Overprint

Address:

%MW10

999 Modify

OK Cancel

302

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

DISPLAY_MSG function

Role

Implementation Implementation of the DISPLAY_MSG function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

Specific parameter:

Message number

The Message number parameter defines the alarm message identifier contained in the CCX 17 memory.

Its value is between 1 and 300.

Example

This function is used to display a message contained in the CCX 17 operator dialog console memory.

The illustration below shows an example of DISPLAY_MSG function entry.

DISPLAY_MSG

Parameters

Console address: ADR# 0.0.4

Data to be sent: %KW200

Report: %MW10 4

Value of data to be sent

Message number: 1

OK Cancel

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

303

Built-in DOP functions

DISPLAY_GRP function

Role This function is used to simultaneously display a group of messages contained in the CCX17 operator dialog console memory.

Implementation

Specific parameter:

Message group number

Implementation of the DISPLAY_MSG function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

The Message group number parameter defines the group message identifier contained in the CCX 17 memory.

Its value is between 1 and 100.

Example of application

The example given below makes use of the DISPLAY_GRP function to display a group of two status messages on the screen of a T CCX 1720 W console containing an application.

This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).

Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 without application, is shown using the

SEND_MSG function.

Application description Variables used l l

The aim of this example is, after setting application to RUN (%S13 =1): l initializing the PLC variables, l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in word table, l l adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution, clearing the console screen (see PANEL_CMD function), displaying the group of state n°1 messages contained in the CCX 17 application, for: l message n°1: Manu and Auto (standard format, moved to line 1, l l

Column 1), message n°2: Four 4 (double format, automatic centering, Line 4), storing the function execution.

%MW0:6: console address

%KW0:x: message 1 data to send

%MW100:4: report

%MW100:X0: activity bit

%MW102: timeout

%M100: activation condition

304

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Introduction to the console

Manu Auto

Oven 4

Fixed messages

Program corresponding to the application

( * INIT console address, condition, timeout

IF %S1.3 THEN

%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;

%MW102:=500;

%M100:=0;

END_IF;

(*Write Auto, Manu and Four4 messages*)

IF NOT %M100 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

DISPLAY_GRP(%MW0:6,%KW0,%MW100:4);

SET %M100;

END_IF;

DISPLAY_GRP

Parameters

Console address: %MW10

Data to be sent: %KW0

Value of data to be sent

Message group number:

Entry help screen corresponding to the application:

6 Report: %MW100 4

OK Cancel

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

305

Built-in DOP functions

DISPLAY_ALRM function

Role

Implementation

This function is used to display an alarm message contained in the CCX17 operator dialog console memory.

Implementation of the DISPLAY_ALRM function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

Note: It is imperative that the associated message in the CCX 17 console is deactivated on the disappearance of the alarm in the PLC (see function

PANEL_CMD), in order to enable a potential new activation of this alarm.

Specific parameter:

Alarm message number

The Alarm message number parameter defines the alarm message identifier contained in the CCX 17 memory.

Its value is between 1 and 300.

l l

An alarm can be activated exclusively by: letter box (requires MMI 17 WIN software), built-in DOP functions

Note: Only the alarms with numbers higher than the length of the letterbox can be accessed by the DISPLAY_ALRM function.

Application example

The example given below makes use of the DISPLAY_ALRM function to display an alarm message on the screen of a T CCX 1720 W console containing an application.

This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).

Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 with application, is shown using the

SEND_ALRM function.

306

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Application description Variables used

Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,

Application: The aim of this example is: l l to detect overshoot of a temperature threshold (500 °C), to display the alarm message contained in the CCX 17 application, for: l Overheat four = xxx °C (standard format, automatic setting imposed by the function, variable with attributes: increment of 50, three-digit integer), l storing the function execution.

%MW0:6: console address

%KW80:x: data to be sent.

%MW100:4: report

%MW100:X0: activity bit

%MW102: timeout

%M103: activation condition

%MW10: Temperature variable

Introduction to the console

System display Alarm message

*ALARM*

Oven overheating = xxx °C

Program corresponding to the application

( *INIT console address, condition, timeout

IF %S1.3 THEN

%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;

%MW102:=500;

%M103:=0;

END_IF;

(*Time overrun control*)

IF %MW10>500 THEN

SET %M12;

ELSE RESET %M12;

END_IF;

(* Write Surch alarm message… *)

IF %M12 AND NOT %M103 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

DISPLAY_ALRM(%MW0:6,%KW0,%MW100:4);

SET %M103;

END_IF;

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

307

Built-in DOP functions

Entry help screen corresponding to the application:

DISPLAY_ALRM

Parameters

Console address: %MW0

Data to be sent: %KW150

6 Report: %MW100 4

Value of data to be sent

Number of alarm message: 1

OK Cancel

308

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

ASK_VALUE function

Role

Implementation

This function is used to display a status message contained in the CCX17 operator dialog console memory on a CCX 17 console screen.

This message includes a variable, which can be modified by the operator.

The entry is made in synchronized mode. Therefore, it is possible to make one single operator entry at each message display.

Implementation of the ASK_VALUE function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

Note: It is strongly advisable to assign parameters for the timeout for an infinite period (see

Parameters field: Report, p. 283 so as not to invalidate the

ASK_VALUE function before the operator entry is made.

Specific parameter:

Status message number

This parameter defines the message identifier contained in the CCX 17 memory.

Its value is between 1 and 300.

Example The illustration below shows an example of ASK_VALUE function entry.

ASK_VALUE

Parameters

Console address:

ADR# 0.0.4

Data to be sent: %KW20

Value of data to be sent

Status message number: 3

6 Data to receive:

Report:

%MW10

%MW20

OK Cancel

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

309

Built-in DOP functions

GET_VALUE function

Role

Implementation Implementation of the GET_VALUE function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

Specific parameter:

Status message number

This parameter defines the message identifier contained in the CCX 17 memory.

Its value is between 1 and 300.

Application example

This function is used to display a status message contained in the CCX17 operator dialog console memory on a CCX 17 console screen.

This message includes a variable, which can be modified by the operator.

Entry is made in multiple mode. The operator thus has the possibility of entering several variables successively, and the PLC program processes the entered value when the variable appears.

The example given below makes use of the GET_VALUE function to display a status message containing a variable on the screen of a T CCX 1720 W console containing an application.

This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).

Note: This same example, using a CCX 17 without application, is shown using the

GET_MSG function.

Application description Variables used

Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,

Application: The aim of this example is, on user request: l l initializing the PLC variables, displaying message n°4 contained in the CCX17 application, for: l Temperature = xxx °C (standard format, automatic centering,

Line 6, variable with attributes: increment of 50, three-digit integer, periodic updating), l storing the function execution.

%MW0:6: terminal address

%KW80:x: data to be sent.

%MW100:4: report

%MW100:X0: activity bit

%MW102: timeout

%M102: activation condition

%MW10: Temperature variable

310

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Introduction to the console

Message displayed on user request

Temperature = xxx °C

Program corresponding to the application

( *INIT console address, condition, timeout

IF %S1.3 THEN

%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;

%MW102:=500;

%M102:=0;

END_IF;

(* Write message Temp… *)

IF NOT %M102 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

GET_VALUE(%MW0:6,%KW100:28,%MW100:4);

SET %M102;

END_IF;

Entry help screen corresponding to the application:

GET VALUE

Parameters

Console address: %MW0

Data to be sent: %KW100

Value of data to be sent

Status message number: 4

6 Report: %MW100 4

OK Cancel

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

311

Built-in DOP functions

CONTROL_LEDS function

Role This function is used to control some CCX 17 console functions.

These functions are: l l relay state (version 2.1 and above), state of the small luminous column LEDs.

The CONTROL_LEDS function is available whether or not the CCX 17 has an application.

Implementation Implementation of the CONTROL_LEDS function is developed in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

Specific parameter: LED status

This parameter defines the current status of each LED.

l l l l the various states can be:

Unchanged,

Off,

Flashing,

On.

Specific parameter: Relay status l l l

This parameter defines the relay status.

the various states can be:

Unchanged,

Open,

Closed.

312

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Application example

The example given below makes use of the CONTROL_LEDS function to control the

T CCX 1720 W console’s green LED status.

This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).

Application description

Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,

Application: The aim of this example is, on rising edge of the variables: l l

Manu

Auto

: controlling the green LED in

Flashing

On mode

mode,

Variables used

%MW0:6: terminal address

%KW200:x:Manu status data to send

%KW210:x: Auto status data to send

%MW100:4: report

%MW100:X0: activity bit

%MW102: timeout

%M0:Manu variable

%M2: Auto variable

Introduction to the console

Green LED

Program corresponding to the application

( *INIT console address, condition, timeout

IF %S1.3 THEN

%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;

%MW102:=500;

%M100:2:=0;

END_IF;

(*State of green LED*)

IF RE %M0 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

CONTROL_LEDS(%MW0:6,%KW200:2,%MW100:4);

END_IF;

IF RE %M2 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

CONTROL_LEDS(%MW0:6,%KW210:2,%MW100:4);

END_IF;

%M0:=%M0;

%M2:=%M2;

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

313

Built-in DOP functions

Entry help screens corresponding to the application:

CONTROL_LEDS

Parameters

Console address:

Data to Send:

%MW0

%KW200

LED status

Report: %MW100 4

Unchanged Off Flashing On

Unchanged Off

Unchanged

Relay status

Unchanged

Off

Flashing On

Open

Flashing

Cancel

CONTROL_LEDS

Parameters

Closed

%MW0

Data to Send: %KW210

LED status

Unchanged Off

Report:

Flashing

Flashing Unchanged

Relay status

Unchanged

Off

Open

Cancel

%MW100 4

Closed

314

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

ASSIGN_KEYS function

Role This function is used to configure all or some of the command keys of a CCX 17 console by linking them to internal bits from the communication master PLC.

Using this function globally modifies the configuration of the affected command keys.

The maximum number of keys that can be configured is twelve, however, only the keys present on the console receiving the command are taken into account.

The ASSIGN_KEYS function is available whether or not the CCX 17 has an application.

Parameters Zone The principle of implementing the Parameters zone is elaborated in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

Zone: Set by l l

This zone is used to specify which out of the PLC or CCX 17 contains the key configuration data.

PLC: the data considered is that entered in the Command key zones,

CCX 17 the data considered is that from the application contained in the console.

Zone: Command key x

Characteristics

Inhibit

Action

Address

Symbol

This zone is used to define the characteristics associated with each key.

The table below shows the various possible characteristics.

Meaning

Invalidates the key status. Its confirmation inhibits the action and address / symbol fields.

Defines the operating mode of the key.

Selecting the mode on edge means that pushing in the key causes the associated bit to be set to 1, and releasing it causes it to be set to 0.

Choosing counter output mode means that pushing in the key changes the bit status. The default value is on edge.

Specifies the %Mi internal bit address associated with the key. If the symbol associated with this bit exists in the station database, it is automatically taken into account during address confirmation.

Specifies the symbol associated with the bit. The address associated with this symbol is automatically taken into account.

Zone: Display command keys

Command keys are configured in groups of four.

This zone is used to access the various groups of keys.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

315

Built-in DOP functions

Application example

The example given below makes use of the ASSIGN_KEYS function to assign a function to the T CCX 1720 W console command keys1 and 2.

This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).

Note: For a CCX 17 with application, the assignment of command keys can be included here, making this PLC application unnecessary.

Application description l l l

Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.0.4) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,

Application: The aim of this example is: to assign the %M0 variable to command key 1, to assign the %M2 variable to command key 2, storing the function execution.

Variables used

%MW0:6: terminal address

%KW240:x: data to be sent.

%MW100:4: report

%MW100:X0: activity bit

%MW102: timeout

%M0: Manu variable

%M2: Auto variable

%M12: condition of execution

%M108: condition of execution

Introduction to the console

Key 1 Key 2

Program corresponding to the application

( * INIT console address, condition, timeout

IF %S1.3 THEN

%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;

%MW102:=500;

%M108:=0;

END_IF;

(* Assign command keys *)

IF %M12 AND NOT %M108 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

ASSIGN_KEYS(%MW0:6,%KW240:16,%MW100:4);

END_IF;

316

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Entry help screens corresponding to the application:

ASSIGN_KEYS

Parameters

Console address:

Data to Send:

%MW0

%KW240

Set by

PLC

Report:

CCX17

%MW100 4

Command key 1

Inhibit

Symbol: Manual

Address:

%MV0

Command key 3

Inhibit

Symbol:

Address:

Action

On edge

On state

Action

On edge

On state

Command key 2

Inhibit

Symbol: Auto

Address:

%M2

Command key 4

Inhibit

Symbol:

Address:

Action

On edge

On state

Action

On edge

On state

Key 9 to 12...

Key 1 to 4...

Display command keys

Key 5 to 8...

Cancel

Built-in DOP functions

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

317

Built-in DOP functions

PANEL_CMD function

Role This function is used to send various simple commands of the following type to the l l l l

MMI console: clearing a line or the screen, printing or clearing the operator entry log, printing or clearing the alarms log, alarm management.

Note: The PANEL_CMD function is available whether or not the CCX 17 has an application.

Parameters field The principle of implementing the Parameters field is elaborated in the Description of parameters (See Description of the parameters common to the different DOP

functions, p. 276) section.

Field: Command This field is used to set the command associated with the PANEL_CMD function.

l l

For: clearing a line; the line number must be specified, canceling an alarm; you must designate the alarm number which corresponds to identifier given while using SEND_ALRM or DISPLAY_ALRM.

318

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Application example

The example below shows the implementation of the PANEL_CMD function for the purpose of canceling a T CCX 1720 W console alarm.

This is connected to a TSX Premium via the AUX port (configured in UNI-TELWAY link, addresses 4 - 5).

Application description l l l

Initial conditions l l l writing the console address (ADR#0.04) in a word table, adjustment of timeout to 50 s, condition of execution,

Application: The aim of this example is: wiping the console screen on user demand, canceling the alarm on fault acknowledgement, storing the function execution.

Variables used

%MW0:6: console address

%KW350:x: Wipe data to be sent,

%KW360:x: Cancel data to be sent,

%MW100:4: report

%MW100:X0: activity bit

%MW102: timeout

%M102: activation condition

%M100: fault acknowledgement

Program corresponding to the application

( *INIT console address, condition, timeout *)

IF %S1.3 THEN

%MW0:6:=ADR#0.0.4;

%MW102:=500;

%M120:2:=0;

END_IF;

(* Clear alarm … *)

IF %M100 AND NOT %M120 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

PANEL_CMD(%MW0:6,%KW360:3,%MW100:4);

SET %M120

END_IF;

* Clear screen *)

IF %M102 AND NOT %M121 AND NOT %MW100:X0 THEN

PANEL_CMD(%MW0:6,%KW350:3,%MW100:4);

SET %M121;

END_IF;

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

319

Built-in DOP functions

Entry help screens corresponding to the application:

PANEL-CMD

Parameters

Console address:

Data to be sent:

%MW0

%KW40

Commands

Clear

Screen

Entry log

Alarm log

Alarm management

Cancel an Alarm

Line

Report:

Line number

%MW100

Clear

Alarm number

Cancel

PANEL-CMD

Parameters

Console address:

Data to be sent:

Commands

ADR#0.0.4

%KW350

Clear

Screen

Entry log

Alarm log

Alarm management

Cancel an Alarm

Line

Clear

Report:

Line number

Alarm number

%MW50 4

OK Cancel

320

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

ADJUST function

Role This function is used to adjust (read and write) language objects (one object at a time) from a CCX 17 or a MAGELIS, by controlling internal words in the PLC memory.

The language objects which can be adjusted are: l l l internal bits (%Mi), internal words or double words (%MWi, %MDi), rack or remote inputs/outputs (%I, %Q, %IW, %QW, %ID, %QD).

l l l

Note: It is strongly advised: to only execute one instance of the ADJUST function per cycle, to only execute the ADJUST function every n cycles.

to assign parameters to the ADJUST function with consecutive words, so as to optimize the reading of internal words on CCX 17 and MAGELIS.

Activating the function (EN)

Read / Write

(R_W)

This parameter is used to execute the ADJUST function.

l l

The types of objects assigned to this parameter may be: an internal bit (%Mi), an internal word extract bit (%MWi:Xj).

This parameter defines the type of operation to be carried out: l l l l read: bit = 0, write: bit = 1.

The types of objects assigned to this parameter may be: an internal bit (%Mi), an internal word extract bit (%MWi:Xj).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

321

Built-in DOP functions

Type of object

(TYPE)

This parameter defines the type of object to be read or written.

The types of objects assigned to this parameter may be: l an internal word (%MWi), l an immediate value.

The table below shows the different types of objects which can be controlled using the ADJUST function.

Type of object

%Mi

%MWi

%MDi

Value of internal word or immediate value

Type of object

%IW

%QW

%ID

%QD

Value of internal word or immediate value

322

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

Object address

(ADR)

This parameter contains the address of the object to be read or written.

The object type assigned to this parameter is a table of eight internal words (%MWi).

The table below shows the content of the different words in the table.

This word contains… Possible values of the word Word order number

Word 0

Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Word 4

Word 5

Word 6

Word 7 the rack number where the language object concerned is situated the number corresponding to the position in the rack of the I/O module or of the processor in which the language object concerned is situated

0 : bit objects, internal words or double words, I/O objects whose operations function is registered in rack 0.

n : other rack I/O objects.

0 : bit objects, internal words and double words, I/O objects whose operations function is associated to channels 1 and

2 of the processor registered at position 0 in the rack.

1 : I/O objects whose operations function is associated to channels 1 and 2 of the processor registered at position 1 the rack.

n : other rack I/O objects.

the channel number in the module where the language object concerned is situated

0 : bit objects, internal words and double words.

1 : I/O objects whose operations function is associated to channel 1 of the processor (communication functions with

PCMCIA).

2 : I/O objects whose operations function is associated to channel 2 of the processor (FIPIO link).

n : other rack I/O objects.

the rank of the I/O object or the number of the internal language object concerned.

0 or n : bit objects, internal words or double words, I/O objects with significant rank.

0 : Other I/O objects.

the connection point number of the device on the FIPIO bus or the rank of the NANET object.

n : NANET or FIPIO objects.

0 : not significant.

the position of the FIPIO module.

0 : basic or not significant module.

1 : extension module the channel number in the FIPIO module or the slave bit on the AS-i bus.

n : AS-i or FIPIO objects.

0 : not significant.

the slave number of the AS-i and NANET buses.

n : AS-i or NANET objects.

0 : not significant.

Value to write

(VAL)

This parameter contains the value to write in the object.

The object type assigned to this parameter is a double word (%MDi).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

323

Built-in DOP functions

Set at 1, or

Incrementation

(SINC) l l

Depending on the type of object to be written, this parameter is used: to set the bit value (%Mi, %Q), to increment by 1 the value of the word or double word (%MWi, %MDi, %QW,

%QD).

Note: the R_W parameter must be set to 1.

The object type assigned to this parameter is an internal bit (%Mi).

Set to 0 or

Decrementation

(RDEC) l l

Depending on the type of object to be written, this parameter is used: to clear the bit value (%Mi, %Q), to decrement by 1 the value of the word or double word (%MWi, %MDi, %QW,

%QD).

Note: the R_W parameter must be set to 1.

The object type assigned to this parameter is an internal bit (%Mi).

This parameter contains the parameter value which has just been read.

The object type assigned to this parameter is a double word (%MDi).

Value of the object read

(VRET)

Management parameters

(GEST)

Examples

The object type assigned to this parameter is a table of 24 internal words (%MWi).

The illustration below shows an example of ADJUST function entry.

Display the call

ADJUST( %MW20:X0.%MW20:X1.%MW21.%MW22:8.%MD30.%MW20:X2.%MW20:X3.%MD32.%MW34:24 )

324

To read the internal double word %MD12, the following values would need to be entered:

Parameter Language object

R_W

TYPE

%MW20:X0

%MW20:X1

%MW21

Value to be entered

Comment

Executing the ADJUST function

Read operation

Type of object: %MD

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Parameter

ADR

VAL

SINC

RDEC

VRET

MAN

Language object

%MW22

%MW23

%MW24

%MW25

%MW26

%MW27

%MW28

%MW29

%MD30

%MW20:X2

%MW20:X3

%MD32

%MD34:24

Built-in DOP functions

Value to be entered

Comment

Not significant

Object number (%MD12)

Not significant

Value of the object read

Buffer parameter for receiving and sending requests

To write value 15 in the rack output word %QW3.2, the following values need to be entered:

Parameter Language object

R_W

TYPE

ADR

VAL

%MW20:X0

%MW20:X1

%MW21

%MW22

%MW23

%MW24

%MW25

%MW26

%MW27

%MW28

%MW29

%MD30

Value to be entered

Comment

Executing the ADJUST function

Write operation

Type of object: %QW

Rack number

Module position

Channel number

Not significant

Value to write

325

Built-in DOP functions

Parameter

SINC

RDEC

VRET

MAN

Language object

%MW20:X2

%MW20:X3

%MD32

%MD34:24

Value to be entered

Comment

Not significant

Value of the object read

Buffer parameter for receiving and sending requests

To increment the output word on FIPIO %QW\1.2.12\0.1, the following values would need to be entered:

Parameter Language object

R_W

TYPE

ADR

VAL

SINC

RDEC

VRET

MAN

%MW20:X0

%MW20:X1

%MW21

%MW22

%MW23

%MW24

%MW25

%MW26

%MW27

%MW28

%MW29

%MD30

%MW20:X2

%MW20:X3

%MD32

%MD34:24

Value to be entered

Comment

Executing the ADJUST function

Write operation

Type of object: %QW

Not significant

Processor address

Channel number of built-in FIPIO link

Not significant

Connection point number

Module number: Standard

Channel number

Not significant

Incrementing the word value by 1

Not significant

Buffer parameter for receiving and sending requests

326

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Built-in DOP functions

To set to 0 the output bit on the AS-i %Q\105.0\7.2 bus, the following values need to be entered:

Parameter Language object

R_W

TYPE

ADR

VAL

SINC

RDEC

VRET

MAN

%MW20:X0

%MW20:X1

%MW21

%MW22

%MW23

%MW24

%MW25

%MW26

%MW27

%MW28

%MW29

%MD30

%MW20:X2

%MW20:X3

%MD32

%MD34:24

Value to be entered

Comment

Executing the ADJUST function

Write operation

Type of object: %Q

Rack number

Module position

Channel number

Not significant

Bit rank (slave input/output)

Slave number

Not significant

Output RESET

Not significant

Buffer parameter for receiving and sending requests

To decrement the output word on NANET %QW\4.0\2.1, the following values would need to be entered:

Parameter Language object

R_W

TYPE

%MW20:X0

%MW20:X1

%MW21

Value to be entered

Comment

Executing the ADJUST function

Write operation

Type of object: %QW

327

Built-in DOP functions

Parameter

ADR

VAL

SINC

RDEC

VRET

MAN

Language object

%MW22

%MW23

%MW24

%MW25

%MW26

%MW27

%MW28

%MW29

%MD30

%MW20:X2

%MW20:X3

%MD32

%MD34:24

Value to be entered

Comment

Rack number

Module position

Channel number

NANET object rank (word number)

Not significant

Slave number

Not significant

Decrementing the word value by 1

Not significant

Buffer parameter for receiving and sending requests

328

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Introduction

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the supplementary information for installing DOP functions.

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section

28.1

28.2

Topic

Precautions for DOP use

Description of the built-in DOP functions "Data to send" parameter coding

Page

330

331

329

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

28.1 Precautions for DOP use

Introduction

List of precautions

The list below is not exhaustive, however, it does group together the errors most frequently encountered whilst installing DOP functions in an application. l l l l l l l l l

Do not forget to initialize the Time-out parameter (%MWi+2) before starting the

Operator Dialogue function. For the ASK_MSG or ASK_VALUE functions, the value has to be 0.

If you use the same word to save each function’s report, you must then test the activity bit (%MWi:X0) at value 0 before starting another function.

Synchronize the start of the different Built-in DOP functions in order that the CCX

17 console command queue does not become full.

Remember to correctly calculate the size of the %KWi internal constants for displaying the data to be sent.

Do not hesitate to allow a margin for error when allocating the data to be sent

(%KWi:n). In fact, if you need to modify the text name, there will be no overlap between the different %KWi:n references.

The maximum size for the Built-in DOP functions is 47 words.

Warning, it is impossible to create a Built-in DOP function in line modification mode, if the application located in the PLC does not already contain a copy of this function.

During power outage or communication loss, the application has to reset the CCX

17 in a coherent state (assigning buttons and messages to the screen).

Canceling modifications or deleting a rung or phrase (List or Text) does not cancel initialization of the %KWi variables.

330

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

28.2

Appendices

Description of the built-in DOP functions "Data to send" parameter coding

Introduction

Aim of this section

What's in this

Section?

This section describes the Data to send parameter.

It is intended for application developers who want to install built-in DOP functions without using the input help screens.

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic

PLC status message display: SEND_MSG function

PLC checked status message entry: ASK_MSG and GET_MSG function

PLC alarm message display: SEND_ALARM function

Display of status, alarm or a group of messages contained in the CCX 17 memory: ASK_VALUE, DISPLAY_MSG, GET_VALUE, DISPLAY_ALRM and

DISPLAY_GRP functions

Page

Display of luminous column LEDS: CONTROL_LEDS function

Configuring command keys: ASSIGN_KEYS function

Generic send command: PANEL_CMD function

346

347

349

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

331

Appendices

PLC status message display: SEND_MSG function

Introduction Status messages can be constructed from the PLC application by creating the send using internal words (%Mwi) as intermediaries to display them on a CCX17 console screen. This is the role of the SEND_MSG function.

Data to send parameter coding

Meaning

Word number

4 to P

P +1

P +2

P +3

P +4

P+5

P+6

P+7

The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (47 words maximum).

contains a marker of value 16#CC17, contains value 0 contains the length in bytes and the zone of the following words, contain the message text to send, this being the characters that are underlined representing the characters expected during the display of a variable. The maximum length of this text is 40 characters.

If the text is composed of an odd number of characters, the last byte is worth 0, if the text is of even length and if it is less than 39 characters, the last byte must contain the value 0, contains the line number where the message must be displayed, contains the column number where the start of the message must be displayed,

This two word zone (four characters) contains the message characteristics and is structured as follows:

Character 1

Character 2

Characters 3 and

This character (in capitals) corresponds to a video attribute: l l l l

B = blinking,

R = reverse video,

A = blinking and reverse video,

N = no attribute

This character (in capitals) corresponds to the character font size: l l

S = normal size,

D = double width or height corresponds to the printing option: l l

Y followed by a space = yes,

N followed by a space = no.

If you do not want to display a variable, the following word must be at 0 (in this instance, following parameters is ignored), otherwise the following parameters must be added: contains the position of the variable to display, counted in number of characters in relation to the start of the message.

contains the number of characters to display for the variable.

Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).

332

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Word number

P+8

Meaning

P+9

P+10 and 11 contain the type of entry field: l l l l l

BIT +space = bit type,

ANA + space = word type,

LNG + space = double word type,

DAY + space = date type,

HOU + space = hour type.

P+12 contains value 0.

P+13 contains a supplementary command: l l l

0: no command,

1: clear screen,

2: clear the line before the display.

contains the value 16#0030.

P+14 contains the type of variable to display: l l l

B +space = bit type,

W + space = word type,

DW = double word type,

Note: for a Date or Hour type, this word contains value 0.

contains: l l the address index of the variable to display for a bit, word or double word type, value –1 for a date or hour type.

Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).

Appendices

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

333

Appendices

Word number

Meaning

P+15 and 16 contain the display format for the variable and are structured in the following ways:

Byte 1 specifies if the variable is signed (sign +), or not (space),

Bytes 2 and 3 specifies the display format:

Byte 2 Byte 2

ASCII or DIGITAL without decimal places the ASCII code for the space, that being 20

DIGITAL with less than ten decimal places

DIGITAL with at least ten decimal places the ASCII code for the space, that being 20 the ASCII code for the number of tens of decimal places the ASCII code for the number of decimal places the ASCII code for the number of decimal place units

P+17

P+18

Byte 4 specifies the display type: l l l

N = no format,

D = Digital,

A = ASCII define if the variable must be refreshed or not: l l

Y + space = yes,

N + space = no.

contains the value N + space,

P+19 to 25 contain the value 0 (7 words).

P Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).

334

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Example of use

Appendices

The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:12

(data to send) of the SEND_MSG(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:12,%MW100:4) function;

Value Comment Word number

%MW0

%MW1

%MW2

%MW3

%MW4

%MW5

%MW6

%MW7

%MW8

%MW9

%MW10

%MW11

N sp

2 ur sp 4

16#CC17

Marker

Imposed value

Byte size of the following zone which includes nine words

Message text

Message text (continued)

Message text (end)

End of message mark

Message position (line number)

Message position (column number)

Message characteristics (no attribute or double font)

Message characteristic (no printing)

The message includes no variable

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

335

Appendices

PLC checked status message entry: ASK_MSG and GET_MSG function

Introduction Checked status messages can be constructed from the PLC application by creating the send using internal words (%MWi) as intermediaries to display them on a CCX17 console screen. This is the role of the ASK_MSG and GET_MSG functions.

Data to send parameter coding

Meaning

Word number

The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (47 words maximum).

4 to P

P +1

P +2

P +3

P +4

P+5

P+6

P contains a marker of value 16#CC17, contains the command type: l l

33 = command number for ASK_MSG,

6 = command number for GET_MSG, contains the length in bytes and the zone of the following words, contain the message text to send, this being the characters that are underlined representing the characters expected during the display of a variable. The maximum length of this text is 40 characters.

This two word zone (four characters) contains the message characteristics and is structured as follows:

Character 1

Character 2

Characters 3 and

This character (in capitals) corresponds to a video attribute: l l l l

B = blinking,

R = reverse video,

A = blinking and reverse video,

N = no attribute

This character (in capitals) corresponds to the character font size: l l

S = normal size,

D = double width or height corresponds to the printing option: l l

Y followed by a space = yes,

N followed by a space = no.

contains the position of the variable to display, counted in number of characters in relation to the start of the message.

contains the number of characters to display for the variable.

Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).

336

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Word number

P+7

P+8

P+9

P+10

P+11

P+12

P+13

P+14

P+15

Appendices

Meaning contains a supplementary command: l l

0: no command (ASK_MSG synchronized entry),

24: free entry authorized after display (GET_MSG multiple entry).

contains the value 16#0030.

contain the type of entry field (in Upper case): l l l

BIT +space = bit type,

ANA + space = word type,

LNG + space = double word type.

contains value 0.

contains the type of variable to display (in Upper case): l l l

B +space = bit type,

W + space = word type,

DW = double word type, contains the address index of the variable to display.

contain the display format for the variable and are structured in the following ways:

Byte 1 specifies if the variable is signed (sign +), or not (space),

Bytes 2 and 3 specifies the display format:

Byte 2 Byte 3

ASCII or DIGITAL without decimal places the ASCII code for the space, that being 20

DIGITAL with less than ten decimal places

Byte 4 specifies the display type: l l l

N = no format,

D = Digital,

A = ASCII

Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

337

Appendices

Word number

Meaning

P+16

P+17 defines whether or not the variable must be updated: l l

Y + space = yes,

N + space = no.

defines the field attributes: l l

I + space = increment,

L + space = others.

P+18 and 19 define the limit type: l l l l

0 = unlimited,

1 = minimum limit only,

2 = maximum limit only,

3 = minimum and maximum limit.

P+20 and 21 contain the minimum limit value.

P+22 and 23 contain the maximum limit value.

P+24 and 25 contain the increment value.

P Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 4 to P).

338

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Example of use

Appendices

The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:38

(data to send) of the GET_MSG(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:38,%MW100:4) function;

Value Comment

%MW14

%MW15

%MW16

%MW17

%MW18

%MW19

%MW20

%MW21

%MW22

%MW23

%MW24

%MW25

%MW26

%MW27

%MW6

%MW7

%MW8

%MW9

%MW10

%MW11

%MW12

%MW13

Word number

%MW0

%MW1

%MW2

%MW3

%MW4

%MW5

%MW28

%MW29

N sp

16#0030

A sp

W sp

10 espesp

°C

11 e esp

= sp

_ sp mp er at ur

16#CC17

Te sp D

Y esp

Marker

Command number for GET_MSG

Byte size of the following zone which includes 35 word

Message text

Message text (continued)

Message text (end)

End of message mark

Text position (line number)

Text position (column number)

Message characteristics (no attribute or double font)

Message characteristic (no printing)

Position of the variable from the start of the message

Number of characters to display

Additional command (entered after display)

Reserved value

Type of entry field (AN = start of ANA)

Type of entry field (continued)

Reserved value

Type of variable to display (W = word type variable)

Address index for the variable to display (%MW10)

Display format (sp for a non signed variable, sp for the start of the decoding of decimal places after the point)

Display format continued (sp for the end of the coding of the number of digits after the point, D for the decimal format)

The variable must be updated

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

339

Appendices

Word number

%MW30

%MW31

%MD32

%MD34

%MD36

Value

I esp

Comment

Entry is incremental

The variable is not limited

Minimum limit value

Maximum limit value

Increment value

340

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

PLC alarm message display: SEND_ALARM function

Introduction Alarm messages can be constructed from the PLC application by creating the send using internal words (%MWi) as intermediaries to display them on a CCX17 console screen. This is the role of the SEND_ALARM function.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

341

Appendices

Data to send parameter coding

The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (37 words maximum).

Word number

Meaning

5 to P contain the message text to send, this being the characters that are underlined representing the characters expected during the display of a variable. The maximum length of this text is 40 characters.

If the text is composed of an odd number of characters, the last byte is worth 0, if the text is of even length and if it is less than 39 characters, the last byte must contain the value 0,

P +1 and 2 This two word zone (four characters) contains the message characteristics and is structured as follows:

P+3

P+4

Character 1

Character 2

This character (in capitals) corresponds to the character font size: l l

S = normal size,

D = double width or height.

corresponds to the printing option: l l

Y = yes,

N = no.

Characters 3 and

4 correspond to the overprinting option: l l

Y followed by a space = yes,

N followed by a space = no.

P+5

P+6

P+7 and 8

P+9

P+10

P contains a marker of value 16#CC17, contains value 0 contains the length in bytes and the zone of the following words, contains the imaginary number given to the alarm message (this word is used after deactivating the alarm if necessary). The value of this word must be between 900 and 999.

contains the number of characters to display for the variable.

contains the value 16#0030.

contain the type of entry field: l l l

BIT +space = bit type,

ANA + space = word type,

LNG + space = double word type, contains value 0.

contains the type of variable to display: l l l

B +space = bit type,

W + space = word type,

DW = double word type,

Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 5 to P).

342

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Word number

Meaning

P+11 contains the address index of the variable to display.

P+12and 13 contain the display format for the variable and are structured in the following ways:

Byte 1

Bytes 2 and 3 specifies if the variable is signed (sign +), or not (space), specifies the display format:

Byte 2 Byte 3

ASCII or DIGITAL without decimal places the ASCII code for the space, that being 20

DIGITAL with less than ten decimal places

Byte 4 specifies the display type: l l l

N = no format,

D = Digital,

A = ASCII

Number of words containing the text of the message to send (see line 5 to P).

Example of use The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:29

(data to send) of the SEND_ALARM(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:29,%MW100:4) function;

Value Comment Word number

%MW0

%MW1

%MW2

%MW3

%MW4

%MW5

%MW6

%MW7

%MW8

%MW9

%MW10

%MW11 fe sp f or r sp

Su rc ha uf

16#CC17

900

Marker

Imposed value

Byte size of the following zone which includes 26 word

Alarm message number

Message text

Message text (continued)

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

343

Appendices

%MW18

%MW19

%MW20

%MW21

%MW22

%MW23

%MW24

%MW25

%MW26

%MW27

Word number

%MW12

%MW13

%MW14

%MW15

%MW16

%MW17

Value

16#0030

A sp

W sp

10 espesp

Y sp

= sp

_ sp

°C

%MW28 sp D

Comment

Message text (continued)

Message text (end)

End of message mark

Message characteristic (Normal size, printing)

Message characteristic (overprinting)

Position of the variable from the start of the message

Number of characters to display

Reserved value

Type of entry field (AN = start of ANA)

Type of entry field (continued)

Reserved value

Type of variable to display (W = word type variable)

Address index for the variable to display (%MW10)

Display format (sp for a non signed variable, sp for the start of the decoding of decimal places after the point)

Display format continued (sp for the end of the coding of the number of digits after the point, D for the decimal format)

344

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Display of status, alarm or a group of messages contained in the CCX 17 memory: ASK_VALUE, DISPLAY_MSG, GET_VALUE, DISPLAY_ALRM and

DISPLAY_GRP functions

Introduction

Example of use l l l

For these functions it is possible to send them by using internal words (%MWi) as intermediaries.

The Data to send parameter requires one word which contains accordingly:

The status message number,

Alarm message number,

Message group number

The example below shows an example of a function using the word %MW0 (data to send).

DISPLAY_GRP(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0,%MW100:4) with %MW0:=3

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

345

Appendices

Display of luminous column LEDS: CONTROL_LEDS function

Introduction It is possible to set the relay status (version 2.1 and above) and the LEDs on the luminous screen of a CCX17 console, then to send them using internal words

(%MWi) as intermediaries. This is the role of the CONTROL_LEDS function.

Data to send parameter coding

Meaning

Word number

The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (2 words).

contains a marker of value 16#CC17, indicates the coding of each LED as well as the relay state to send to the terminal.

l l l l bits 0 to 3: green LED status, bits 4 to 7: yellow LED status, bits 8 to 11: red LED status, bits 12 to 15: relay status, the state of each of the LEDS is coded on four bits as follows: l l l l

0000: unchanged LED status,

0001: LED off,

0010: LED on,

1111: LED flashing.

the relay status is coded on bits 12 to 15 as follows: the state of each of the indicators is coded on four bits as follows: l l l

0000: unchanged relay status,

0001: open relay status,

0010: closed relay status.

Example of use The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:2

(data to send) of the CONTROL_1EDS(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:2,%MW100:4) function;

Value Comment Word number

%MW0

%MW1

16#CC17

16#1112

Marker

Green LEDS on, yellow and red off, open relay status

346

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Configuring command keys: ASSIGN_KEYS function

Introduction It is possible to set the configuration of the command keys (bit associated or not, key operating mode, assignment by CCX17…) and send it using internal words (%MWi) as intermediaries to display them on a CCX17 console screen. This is the role of the

ASSIGN_KEYS function.

Data to send parameter coding

Meaning Word number

The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (12 words).

2 contains a marker of value 16#CC17,

If a PLC carries out the assignment… this word contains the list of keys to configure. Each command key is coded on a bit (0: non configured, 1: configured): l bit i (i = 1 to 8) command key no. 1.

the following two words indicate the operating mode of each of the command keys. Each key is coded by two bits l l l l

00: Reset,

01: functioning mode on edge,

10: toggle functioning mode,

11: no action.

Bits 2j,2j+1 = command key i+1 (i = 0 to 11) the following eight words contain, accordingly: l l a value –1 when the command keys are not affected, the index of the internal bits affected by the command keys

Word i = command key i (i = 1 to 8)

If a CCX 17 carries out the assignment… this word contains 16#F000 the values of the following ten words are indifferent and will be ignored by the CCX 17 console.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

347

Appendices

Example of use The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:16

(data to send) of the ASSIGN_KEYS (ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:16,%MW100:4) function;

Comment Word number

%MW0

%MW1

%MW2

%MW3

%MW4

%MW5

%MW6 to

%MW15

Value

10 rc

-1

16#CC17

16#000F

16#FF09

16#00FF

Marker

Command keys 1 to 4 are configured, the others are not.

Key 1 in edge mode (01), key 2 in toggle mode (02), keys 3 and 4 inhibited (00), the others not programmed (11)

Key 1 affected by bit %M10

Key 1 affected by bit %M11

Keys 3 to 8 not affected

348

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Generic send command: PANEL_CMD function

Introduction It is possible to manage different command types (clearing, printing) and to send them by using internal words (%MWi) as intermediaries. This is the role of the

PANEL_CMD function.

Data to send parameter coding

Meaning

Word number

The table below shows the significance of the different words which constitute the following parameter: Data to send (3 words maximum).

3 contains a marker of value 16#CC17, contains the command number: l l l l l l l l

1: clear screen,

2: clear a line,

9: print the alarm message log,

10: clear the alarm message log,

11: print the alarm log

13: clear the alarm log,

29: clear the alarm (from 1 to 300) destined for CCX 17,

30: clear the alarm (from 900 to 999) destined for the PLC.

indicates the command parameter.

l l l clear line = line number, cancel alarm = alarm number, other commands: no object.

Example of use The example below shows the values corresponding to the word table %MW0:2

(data to send) for the PANEL_CMD(ADR#0.0.4,%MW0:2,%MW100:4) function;

Value Comment Word number

%MW0

%MW1

16#CC17

Marker

Clear screen

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

349

Appendices

350

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Process control functions

At a Glance

Overview

What's in this part?

This Part gives you information on the process control functions on Micro PLCs and describes how to install them using PL7 Micro, Junior and Pro software.

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter

Chaptername

General on the PID

Description of the regulation functions

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Example of application

Appendices

Page

351

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Process control functions

352

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General on the PID

Introduction

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter introduces the standard regulation functions of the PL7 software.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

General introduction

Principal of the regulation loop

Development methodology of a regulation application

Page

354

355

356

353

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General on the PID

General introduction

General The regulation functions are the standard elements of the PL7 language.

They support programming of the regulation loops of the Micro and Premium PLC’s.

These functions are particularly adapted to: l answering the needs of the sequential process which need the auxiliary adjustment functions (examples: Plastic film packaging machine, finishing treatment machine, presses…), l respond to the needs of the simple adjustment process’ (examples: metal furnaces, ceramic furnaces, small refrigerating groups…), l respond to the automatic control features or to the mechanical regulation which has a critical sampling time (examples: torque regulation, speed regulation).

A pre-configured interface with the CCX_17 range supports the driving and the adjustment of the regulation loops. In this area, up to 9 regulation loops are accessible via the CCX_17.

Available functions

Note: There is not a limit to the number of PID functions that are available in a function. In practice, it is the maximum number of input and output modules which are accepted by the PLC that limits the number of loops.

The standard regulation functions are split into two categories: l a family of algorithm functions: l l

PID function to execute a mixed PID correction (serial – parallel),

PWM function to execute the modulation adjustment period on the discrete l l outputs,

SERVO function to execute the motor command adaptations, an operator dialogue function (PID_MMI) which integrates a driving and adjustment application for the PID application on CCX_17 version 2.

The PID_MMI function is linked to 3 types of pre-configured screens.

354

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

General on the PID

Principal of the regulation loop

Introduction

Illustration l l

The working of a regulation loop has three distinct phases: l the acquisition of data and of: l l measurements from the process’ sensors (analog, encoders), setpoint(s) generally from PLC internal variables or from data from the

CCX_17.

execution of the PID regulation algorithm, the sending of orders adapted to the characteristics of the actuators to be driven via the discrete or analog outputs.

The PID algorithm generates the command signal from: l l l the measurement sampled by the input nodule, the setpoint value fixed by either the operator or the program, the values of the different corrector parameters.

The signal from the corrector is either directly handled by an analog output card of the PLC linked to the actuator, or handled via the PWM or SERVO adjustments in function with the kinds of actuator to be driven on a PLC discrete output card.

The following diagram schematizes the principal of a regulation loop.

Operator dialogue desk

CCX 17

Corrector

PLC

Adapter

Process to order

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

355

General on the PID

Development methodology of a regulation application

Diagram of the principal

The following diagram describes the linking of tasks to be carried out during the creation and debugging of a regulation application.

Note: The defined order is given for information only.

Application / Configuration

Configuration of interfaces

Discrete, Analog, Counts

Application / Data

Input data

constant, mnemonic,

numerical values

Programming: Ladder, List

MAST, FAST, SR

Regulation functions,

Operator dialogue

Animation tables

Variable table

PLC /Connector

Transfer of the application

in the PLC

Debugging

program

and adjustment

Debugging

by the CCX 17

356

File / Save

Storing of

the application

Documentation

Application

folder

Operating

the regulation

loops

Operating

the process via the

CCX 17

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

Introduction

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter describes the regulation functions.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Programming a regulation function

PID Function

Programming the PID function

PWM Function

Programming the PWM function

SERVO Function

Programming the SERVO function

Performance of the functions in the operating mode

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

357

Description of the regulation functions

Programming a regulation function

Programming rules

The regulation function parameters must all be informed. The functions use 3 kinds l l l of parameters: read only parameters, considered at the beginning of the function’s execution, write only parameters, positioned at the conclusion of the function’s execution, the read and write only parameters, whose contents are considered at the beginning of the function’s execution, are then updated by the results of the function.

Note: The regulation functions must be programmed in a periodic task (MAST periodic or FAST). They must not be conditioned.

Parametering The word type input parameters are the analog sizes expressed in the scale [0,

+10000] and can be directly connected to measurement sensors via the words

%IWxy.i des analog inputs.

The bit type output parameters support ordering discrete actuators and can be directly connected to the %Qxy.i. type variables.

In the same way, the word type output parameters support ordering of analog actuators on the scale [0, +10000] and can be directly appointed to the %QWxy.i. type variables.

The MWi:L word table type parameters regroup the user parameters and the data necessary to the internal working of the function.

If the length of a table is sufficient, the function is not executed.

Note: In order to keep the adjustment parameters of the OF adjustment on cold start, it is necessary to delete the %MWi reset to zero option (in the processor’s configuration screen).

358

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

PID Function

General

Available functions

The PID function completes a PID correction via an analog measurement and setpoint on the [0-10000] format and provides an analog command to the same format.

The PID OF is composed of the following functions: l l l l l l l l l serial / parallel PID algorithm, forward / backward action (according to the KP gain sign), action derived from measurement or from distance, high and low limitation of the setpoint to [0-10000], high and low limitation of the output in automatic mode, anti-saturation of the integral action,

Manual/Automatic operating modes without definitely changing,

PID access control through the dialog operator, operating in integrator for (KP = TD =0).

l l

Note:

The display parameters used by the CCX 17 are shown in physical units,

For a correct PID operation, you must stay within the scale of [0-1000] for the measurement and the setpoint.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

359

Description of the regulation functions

Operating principles

The following diagram presents the operating principle of the PID function.

CORRECTOR P.I.D

The Setpoint branch

INTERNAL

SETPOINT

SET POINT

S.P

INTERNAL

MEASUREM

PROCESS

VALUE

P.V

10000

Limiter

Deviation Integrated

SETPOINT

USED

MEASUREMENT

USED

ε

Derivative action

Action derived on the measurement

PV_DEV

Derived

The PID action

The Measurement branch

OUT_MAX

Limiter

OUT_MIN

The PID operation modes

AUTO

OUTP

OUT_MAN

Followed without repeated command attempts on Auto – Manu >switching

DIALOGUE OPERATOR CCX 17

- PV_MMI - PV_SUP

- SP_MMI - PV_INF

Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See Programming

the PID function, p. 361) module.

360

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

Programming the PID function

At a Glance PID functions are standard PL7 functions. They are therefore available from the function library.

This means that it is possible, by working with the language editors, to use assisted entry for a PID function in order to facilitate programming.

Note: A PID function can be entered in any periodic task (MAST or FAST). The function must not be subject to any conditions.

Illustration The illustration below shows the Functions screen in the library which can be used to implement the PID function.

Function Information: Parameters

Family

Orphee function

Timer functions

GRAFCET

Single precision reals

Process control

Integer tables

Call format

V.Bib V.App

2.10

2.00

1.00

2.22

2.01 2.01

2.10

PID

Name

PID_MMI

PWM

SERVO

Mixed PID controller

Management of dedicated HMI on CCX17 for PIDs

Pulse Width Modulation of a numerical value

PID output stage for discrete valve control

FUNCTION parameters:

Name Type Nature

TAG STRING IN

UNIT STRING

PV WORD

OUT WORD OUT

Comment

Label of PID (8 char.), used by the HMI on CCX17

Unit of measurement (6 char.), used by the HMI>>

Process variable, format [0; +10000]

Output, format [0; +10000]

“TEMP”

Comment

“DEGRES”

%MW10

%MW11

Entry field

Display the call

PID ( “TEMP”,”DEGRES”,%MW10,%MW11,TRIG_PROD_A,%MW20:43 )

Syntax The call syntax for the PID function is:

PID(TAG,UNIT,PV,OUT,AUTO,PARA)

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

361

Description of the regulation functions

Parameters of the PID function

The table below shows the different parameters of the PID function.

Parameter Type Nature

IN = Input

OUT =

Output

TAG IN 8 characters (maximum) or

%MBi:L where L is less than or equal to 8

UNIT

6 characters (maximum) or

%MBi:L where L is less than or equal to 6

%MWi or %IWxy.i.j

Default value

Description

Name used for the PID used by the CCX 17.

Unit of measure for the PID used by the CCX

17.

OUT

AUTO

PARA

%MWi or %QWxy.i.j

%Mi , %Ixy.i or %Qxy.i

%MWi:43

OUT

IN / OUT

IN / OUT -

Input representing the process variable for the function.

Analog output of the PID.

If TI = 0, an offset of 5000 is added to the OUT output in Auto mode.

Operating mode of the PID and the CCX 17.

0: manual, 1 = Auto.

(See table below for details of PARA table).

The table below shows the different parameters of the PARA table:

Parameter

OUT_MAN

Position

%MWi

%MW(i+1)

%MW(i+2)

%MW(i+3)

%MW(i+4)

%MW(i+5)

Function

Internal setpoint in 0/10000 format

Value of the manual output of the PID (between

0 and 10000)

Proportional gain of the PID (x100), with sign and without units (-10000<KP<+10000). The sign of

Kp determines the direction in which the PID acts

(negative: direct, positive: reverse)

Integral time of the PID (between 0 and 20000) expressed in 10

-1

seconds

Derivative time of the PID (between 0 and 10000) expressed in 10

-1

seconds

Sampling period of the PID (between 1 and

32000) expressed in 10

-2

seconds The actual sampling period will be a multiple of the task period in which the PID closest to TS is located

362

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Parameter

OUT_MAX

OUT_MIN

PV_DEV

NO_BUMP

DEVAL_MMI

PV_SUP (CCX 17)

PV_INF (CCX 17)

PV_MMI (CCX17)

SP_MMI (CCX 17)

Position

%MW(i+6)

%MW(i+7)

%MW(i+8):X0

%MW(i+8):X4

%MW(i+8):X8

%MW(i+9)

%MD(i+11)

%MD(i+13)

%MD(i+15)

Description of the regulation functions

Function

Upper limit of the PID output in auto mode.

(between 0 and 10000)

Lower limit of the PID output in auto mode.

(between 0 and 10000)

Derivative action chosen 0 = on process variable,

1 = on deviation

Bump or bumpless mode.

0 = bumps, 1 = no bumps

= 1 : inhibits acknowledgment of the PID by the

Human Machine Interface.

= 0 : the PID is used by the Human Machine

Interface.

This bit makes it possible to avoid having to carry out scale conversions on PIDs not being used by the CCX_17, and to select the PIDs being used, particularly when there are more than 9 PIDs in the PL7 application.

Upper limit of the process variable scale, in physical units (x100) (between -9 999 999 and +

9 999 999).

Lower limit of the process variable scale, in physical units (x100) (between -999 999 and + 9

999 999).

Image of the process variable in physical units

(x100)

Operator setpoint and image of the setpoint, in physical units (x100)

Note: l The other parameters used for internal management of the PID must never be modified by the application.

l The values used by the CCX 17 are multiplied by 100 so that they can be shown with 2 figures after the decimal point on the CCX 17 (the CCX 17 does not use floating point format but supports a fixed decimal point format).

363

Description of the regulation functions

Rules There is no alignment of the internal setpoint to the process variable in manual mode.

Scaling is only performed when one of the setpoints is modified (SP or DOP_SP).

The algorithm without integral action (TI = 0) performs the following operation:

The output is ...

For

ε t = SP – PV

Where ...

Dt= action dérivée

The algorithm with integral action (TI <0) performs the following operation:

For

ε t = SP – PV

The output is ...

∆

OUT = KP [

∆ε ε ∆

Dt]/100 OUT

= OUT +

∆

OUT

Where ...

Dt= action dérivée

On cold start, the PID resumes in manual, with the output at 0. To impose automatic mode or a manual input not at zero after a cold start, you must program the initialization sequence after the PID call.

364

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Examples

Description of the regulation functions

The examples provided below are in Ladder language.

Where the process control Human Machine Interface is used (DEVAL_MMI = 0)

(* PID correction on temperature process control loop *)

OPERATE

PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW1>> with PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW11,%M10,%MW20:43)

Where no Human Machine Interface is used DEVAL_MMI = 1.

(* PID correction on process control loop without built-in HMI

OPERATE

PID(‘ ’,’ ’,%MW10,%MW1>> with PID(‘ ’,’ ’,%IW3.1,%QW4.0,%M10,%MW20:43)

Note: In this example, the TAG and UNIT parameters are not applicable, so you can simply enter the values.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

365

Description of the regulation functions

PWM Function

General

Operating principles

The PWM function supports regulation of a pulse width on a TOR output. It is a function that formats the PID’s output.

The pulse width depends on the PID’s output (The PWM function’s INP input) and the modulation period.

The circuit diagram of the function’s operation is as follows:

PID OUTP INP

PWM PW_O

T_MOD

Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See Programming

the PWM function, p. 368) module.

366

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Pulse widths

Description of the regulation functions

To each TOP of the T_MOD modulation period, the activation period in 10

-3

second of the PW_O output is calculated according to the following formula:

State 1 of the gap (shown in 10

-2

seconds) = INP * T_MOD / 1000

The following timing diagram illustrates this formula:

PW_O

Modulation period

50% 75% 35%

Time

Width of pulse

Practical rules T_MOD = TS (where TS is the sampling period of the upstream PID),

The period of the current task (expressed in 10

-3

second) is equal to:

(Required resolution)* 10 * T_MOD .

The PID is in the MAST task, the MAST’s period is 50*10

-3

s, TS = 500*10

-2

s and the required resolution is 1/50 (a T_MOD period must contain at least 50 periods of the current task).

T_MOD = TS = 500.

The period of the task where the PWM is introduced must therefore be less than 500

* 10 /50 =100 10

-3

The PWM function can therefore be programmed in the MAST task. the resolution will be 1/100.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

367

Description of the regulation functions

Programming the PWM function

Introduction The PWM function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.

From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a PWM function’s input to facilitate its programming.

Note: The PWM function’s input can be done in any periodic task (MAST or FAST).

The function does not have to be conditioned.

Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the PWM function.

Information Functions: Parameters

Family

Orphee Function

Stalling functions

GRAFCET

Single precision reals

Process Control

Integer tables

Call format

Lib.V App.V.

2.10

2.00

1.00

2.22

2.01 2.01

2.10

PID

Name

PID_MMI

PWM

SERVO

Mixed PID regulator

Comment

Management of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from

Pulse width modulation of a numerical size

PID output stage for open/close valve order

Parameters of the FUNCTION:

Name Type

INP

PARA

WORD

PW_O EBOOL

AR_W

Kind Comment

IN Numerical size to modulate

OUT Discrete output cyclic report equal to the LESS than value

IN/OUT PWM parameters (5 word table)

%MW11

%Q6.3

%MW90:5

Entry field

Call display

PWM ( %MW11,%Q6.3,%MW90:5 )

Syntax The PWM function’s call syntax is:

PWM(INP,PW_0,PARA)

368

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

The table below presents the different parameters of the PWM function. Parameters of the PWM function

Parameter Type Description

INP

PW_0

PARA

%MWi

%Qxy.i ou %Mi

%MWi:5

Kind

IN = Input

OUT = Output

OUT

IN / OUT

Analog value to be modulated in the pulse width (format [0 – 10000])

Logic output (TOR) whose aspect ratio is the image of the INP input

Modulation period shown in 1/100ths of seconds (between 0 and 32767). T_MOD must be more than or equal to the current task’s period and it is adjusted by the system to be a whole multiple of this.

Table of 5 words whose first word corresponds to the T_MOD parameter.

The following are used internally by the function and must never be modified by the application

Examples The example offered below is done in Ladder language.

(* PID furnace regulation *)

OPERATE

PID(‘FOUR’,’DEGRES’,%IW4.0,%MW>>

(* Alignment of the T_MOD (PWM) on the TS of the PID *)

OPERATE

%MW90:=%MW105

(* Discrete output command in period modulation *)

OPERATE

PWM(%MW11,%Q6.3,%MW90:5) with PID(‘FOUR’,’DEGRES’,%IW4.0,%MW11,%M10,%MW100:43)

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

369

Description of the regulation functions

SERVO Function

General The SERVO function supports regulation with a motor type actuator steered by 2 alternating actions (UP and DOWN).

Note: It must be connected in tandem with the analog output of a PID. It cannot be used alone.

When there is a copy of a position, the valve’s position is locked via the INP

(setpoint) and POT (position measurement) inputs.

When the copy does not physically exist, the algorithm no longer uses the PID’s absolute output but the output’s variation. The UP output (or DOWN, according to the variation sign) is put at 1 for a length of time proportional to the actuator opening time and to the variation of the value. Also the notion of minimum pulse time is introduced.

Principle of operating with a position copy

The SERVO function locks the motor’s position according to a setpoint of the INP position from a PID’s output on the [0-10000] format, and to a POT position measurement.

The locking algorithm is a relay with hysteresis.

In this case, the PID, T_MOTOR and T_MINI parameters are not used.

SERVO

OUTP INP

PID

DOWN

POT HYST

Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See

Programming the SERVO function, p. 374) module.

370

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Principle of operating without a position copy

(POT= -10000)

Description of the regulation functions

In this case the SERVO function synchronizes itself with the upstream PID via the bias of the PID parameters table, passed in parameter to the SERVO function.

The algorithm receives in input the PID’s variation output and converts it into pulse period, according to the following formula:

T_IMP (shown in 10

-3

s) = OUT x T_MOTOR / 1000

The acquired period adds itself to the remaining period of the preceding cycles: in fact, what is not "consumed" in a cycle is memorized for the following cycles. This ensures a smooth operation especially with sudden variations of the (ex: PID setpoint level) command and in manual mode.

Note: The description of the parameters used is presented in the (See

Programming the SERVO function, p. 374) module.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

371

Description of the regulation functions

Example The example offered below is done in Ladder language.

+20%

+2%

+24%

OUT

1 2 3 4 5

+22%

DOWN

5 s 1 s

1 s

T_MOTOR = 25 s

T_MINI = 1 s

Caption:

The PID variation output is of +20% (T_MOTOR pulse =25 s for a 100% variation), in this case the pulse affects the UP output for a period of 5 s,

The PID variation is of +2%, which would correspond to a pulse of 0.5 s. This pulse is less than T_MINI (=1 s.), and it does not affect the outputs,

A second variation of +2% appears and the function holds this variation concurrently with the preceding one (which corresponded to a variation less than the minimal value) for its calculation, which corresponds to a positive global variation of

+4%, and therefore to a pulse of 1 s on the UP output,

A variation of –24% appears and the activated pulse is therefore of 6 s on the

DOWN output,

Before the following second, another variation of +22% brings the system back to a global variation of 2% < to the variation of T_MINI (4%). The function finishes carrying out the minimal pulse of 1 s.

Note 1: The SERVO function does not manage the position limits, these must be managed by the application. If a limit is detected, you must force the output corresponding to 0 (UP for the high limit, DOWN for the low limit).

372

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

Example: (done in Ladder language)

(* Management of limits *)

Limit_up

Limit_down

OPERATE

SERVO(Outp,%IW3.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%M>>)

%Q2.1

%Q2.2

Note 2: Passing to the operating mode with copy to the mode without copy is possible (for example: when the copy has an error, go to mode without copy).

373

Description of the regulation functions

Programming the SERVO function

Introduction The SERVO function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.

From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a SERVO function’s input to facilitate its programming.

Note: The SERVO function’s input can be done in any periodic task (MAST or

FAST). The function does not have to be conditioned.

Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the SERVO function.

Information Functions: Parameters

Family

Single precision reals

Process Control

Integer tables

Bit tables

Integer tables

Call format

Lib.V App.V.

2.22

2.01

2.00

2.10

2.00

PID

Name

PID_MMI

PWM

SERVO

Mixed PID regulator

Management of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from PID

Modulated in the pulse width of a numerical size

PID output stage for open/close valve order

Parameters of the PROCEDURE:

Name Type

INP WORD

Kind Comment

Position setpoint, format [0;10000] (to conn>>

POT

DOWN

WORD

EBOOL

OUT

Position copy, format [0;10000] [-10000>>

Alternating output, UP operating direction

Alternating output, DOWN operating direction

OUTP

-10000

%Q2.1

Comment

%MW100:43

Entry field

Call display

SERVO ( OUTP,-10000,%Q2.1,%MW100:43,%MW180:10 )

Syntax The SERVO function’s call syntax is:

SERVO(INP,POT,UP,DOWN,PID,PARA)

374

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

Parameters of the SERVO function

Parameter

INP

POT

DOWN

PID

PARA

The table below presents the different parameters of the SERVO function.

Type

%MWi

%MWi or direct

%Qxy.i or %Mi bit type %Q or

%MWi:43

Kind

IN = Input

OUT = Output

Description

OUT

IN / OUT

Position setpoint ([0 – 10000] format) that has to be connected to the PID output.

Position copy, ([0 - 10000] format)

0 : closed valve; 10000: open valve.

If the copy does not exist. POT must be initialized at –10000.

This particular value indicates "no copy".

Output signal for the motor’s UP operating direction.

Output signal for the motor’s DOWN operating direction.

%MWi:10 IN / OUT

The PARA parameter table of the upstream PID. Used if there are no copy words for the synchronization with the upstream

PID. See

Parameters of the PID function, p. 362 .

(See the table below for the breakdown of the PARA table).

The table below presents the different parameters of the PARA table:

Parameter

T_MOTOR

T_MINI

HYST

Position

%MWi

%MW(i+1)

%MW(i+2)

Function

Valve opening time shown in 10

-2

Used if the copy does not exist (POT = -10000).

Minimal pulse time shown in 10

-2

Used if the copy does not exist (POT = -10000).

Value of the hysteresis on the [0 – 10000] format.

Used if the copy does not exist (POT: [0 - 10000]).

Note: l The other parameters that are used by the function’s internal management must never be modified by the application.

l All the parameters are obligatory, regardless of the operating mode.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

375

Description of the regulation functions

Examples The examples offered below are done in Ladder language.

Case with a position copy.

OPERATE

PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO>> with PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO,%MW100:43)

OPERATE

PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW1>> with SERVO(OUTP,%IW3.1,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%MW100:43,%MW180:10)

Case without a position copy.

OPERATE

PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO>> with PID(‘PID1’,’m/s’,PV,OUTP,MAN_AUTO,%MW100:43)

OPERATE

PID(‘TEMP’,’DEGRES’,%MW10,%MW1>> with SERVO(OUTP,-10000,%Q2.1,%Q2.2,%MW100:43,%MW180:10)

376

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Description of the regulation functions

Performance of the functions in the operating mode

Introduction

Cold start

Warm restart

This paragraph describes the performance of the functions in different starting l l l cases: cold start (new application, change of cartridge…), warm restart (power return without changing the application context), first execution after adding a function via modification in connected mode.

This type of start occurs for a new application or a change of cartridge.

On a cold start, the PLC can start automatically in RUN (according to the application’s configuration). The function correctors have a security performance: manual mode, outputs at 0. In addition, this supports the switching of the PLC into

RUN mode without carrying out the PID adjustment, then its debugging with the

CCX 17 (the adjustment can only be done in RUN).

This type of restart occurs for a power return, without changing the application context.

With a power return after an outage (regardless of how long it lasted) and if the application context is not lost or modified, the functions go back to their state before the outage. If the user wants to use another performance, it is his responsibility to test the %S1 system bit and to associate the required processing to it (forcing in manual mode…).

Note: The PLC’s time-and-date stamp allows you find out the duration of the last outage.

Adding a new call in connected mode

Following the addition of a new function regulation call in connected mode, an identical initialization to the case of the cold start is carried out.

Note: In order to be seen as a new function, this must use a new parameter table.

Therefore, the removal of a PID, followed by adding a PID that uses the same parameter table is not considered as an addition of a new PID. In this case the PID is executed in the same state and with the same parameters as the preceding PID.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

377

Description of the regulation functions

378

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Introduction

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter presents the operator dialogue on CCX 17.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Dialog operator on the CCX 17

Selecting a loop

Controlling a loop

Adjusting a loop

PID_MMI Function: programming

Performance of the PID_MMI function according to the PLC and CCX 17’s operating modes

Page

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

379

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Dialog operator on the CCX 17

Introduction The CCX 17 permits viewing and control of all the modifiable parameters of a PID corrector without having to program a specific aplication.

The dialog operator function integrates a control and adjustment application on the

CCX 17 application’s PIDs. It provides management of 3 types of screens on the

CCX 17 supporting selection of a PID, viewing and controlling of this PID and adjusting the parameters of the PID. It inserts itself easily into any dialog operator application on the CCX 17.

Note: This function is only effective if the PLC is in RUN.

Limitations There is no limit to the number of PIDs in the application. On the other hand, a maximum of 9 PIDs are accessible via the dialog operator function on the CCX 17-

30 and on the CCX 17-30.

Navigating from one screen to another is done via the CCX’s command buttons and within screens via the up and down arrow buttons. The navigation offered is a

"vertical" navigation. You must always return to the loop selection screen to gain access to the values of other correctors.

The display is done over 4 lines (8 lines with the CCX 17-30) with the messages in

40 characters.

380

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

What the keys do

Position of the keys

Fixed messages

Functions

The MOD key supports switching from display mode to input mode (in this case, the selected value starts flashing).

On the same screen, the input mode remains active for all the fields and pressing MOD again allows you to exit the input mode (stopping the flashing).

In input mode, the modification of a parameter is acknowledged by pressing the ENTER key.

MOD ENTER

Set up principle Setting up the dialog operator is easy: l l the PID_MMI function(s) are started at each cycle (non-conditioned call), a single call to the PID_MMI function manages all the application’s PIDs.

However, a call from the PID_MMI function via CCX_17, which is connected to the PLC is necessary, l detection of the application’s PIDs via the PID_MMI function is automatic, including when adding or removing in RUN. Therefore there is no declaration to l do,

Identification of the required corrector is done via the "TAG" parameter from the

PID function and its selection depends on the value of the function’s

"DEVAL_MMI" parameter. (Only acknowledged via the PID_MMI function, the

PIDs whose DEVAL_MMI parameter is = 0).

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

381

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Selecting a loop

Introduction

Selection screen

Display

The number of PIDs operated by the CCX 17s is a maximum of 9 loops, regardless of the number of connected CCX 17s.

Ex 1 : TEMPERA

4 : FURNACE

7 : TANK

2 : DEBIT1 3 : DEBIT2

5 : LEVEL

8 : HOPPER

6 : BOILER

9 : MIXER

Rf LOOP SELECT : 0

Functions

This screen displays all the labels implemented in the

PL7.

A figure is associated to each label (from 1 to 9 maximum).

To control a loop, the operator must input the corresponding number.

After inputting the loop number, the loop controlling screen is displayed.

Pressing the Exit (Ex) button allows you to leave the regulation screens.

Pressing the Refresh (Rf) button allows you to refresh the screen. This operation must be performed after deleting or adding loops via the PL7 in connected mode.

Note: If the application has no accessible PID via the CCX 17 (whether there is no

PID in the application, or the PID’s existing DEVAL_MMIs are all at 1), the "NO

PID" message is displayed. The Exit and Refresh buttons keep their functions.

382

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Controlling a loop

Introduction

Selection screen

Display

This screen supports control over the setpoint, command and Manual/Auto mode values. The PV_INF and PV_SUP values are also displayed and controlable via this screen and they allow you to set the scale of the measurement in physical units.

Up FURNACE AUTO

OUT

: 66,00 units

: 51,50

: 45,00

SUP : 100,00

INF : 100,00

Functions

The Manual/Auto screen is highlighted. Every time you press the associated command button you switch from one mode to the other.

In automatic mode, controlling an output is not authorized.

You can switch from one input field to another by using the up and down arrow keys. The operating mode is as follows: as soon as the screen is displayed, it is the SP value which is selected (highlighted), then using the down arrow button, OUT (if manual), LESS and MORE.

Pressing MOD supports switching into input mode (press

MOD again to exit it).

The Dn button gives access to the adjustment screen and to return to the loop selection screen use the UP button.

(the PV, SP, OUT, LESS and MORE values are displayed as integers with 2 significant figures after the comma).

PV, SP, LESS and MORE are in physical units. OUT is in percentage.

Note: When a field is flashing (input mode), the value is not refreshed in case of modification by the application or the PL7.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

383

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Adjusting a loop

Introduction This screen supports adjustment of the PID parameters (KP, TI, TD, TS) as well as the output limits OUT_MIN and OUT_MAX.

Selection screen

Display

Up Up

TI(s)

Ts(s)

OUT_MIN

FURNAC

TD(s)

PV_DEV

OUT_MAX : 0,0

: 1,0

: -20,00

: 1,00

: 0,0

: 20,00

Functions

You can switch from one input field to another by using the up and down arrow keys.

As soon as the screen is displayed, the KP value is displayed (highlighted).

The KP parameter has no unit. TI, TD and TS are in seconds. OUT_MIN and OUT_MAX are in percentage.

Pressing the Up button returns you to the loop controlling screen.

Note: When a field is flashing (input mode), the value is not refreshed in case of modification by the application or the PL7.

384

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

PID_MMI Function: programming

Introduction The PID_MMI function supports establishment of the dialog with the PLCs to which the CCX 17 is connected. A PID_MMI function is necessary via CCX 17 for the steering, the display and the adjustment of the application’s PIDs.

The PID_MMI function is a standard PL7 function. As such, it is available from the functions library.

From the language editors there, it is possible to use the help of a PID_MMI function’s input to facilitate its programming.

Note: Inputting a PID_MMI function must be done in the task with the slowest period containing PIDs (MAST or FAST). The function does not have to be conditioned.

Example: An application with: l a FAST task at 10*10

-3

s containing PIDs, l a MAST task at 50*10

-3

s containing PIDs, the PID_MMI function must therefore be programmed in the MAST task.

Illustration The illustration below gives you a general idea of the Functions screen in the library supporting the implementation of the PID_MMI function.

EF DFB

Information Functions: Parameters

Family

Orphee Function

Stalling functions

GRAFCET

Single precision reals

Process Control

Integer tables

Call format

Lib.V App.V.

2.10

2.00

1.00

2.22

2.10

2.01 2.01

PID

PWM

Name

PID_MMI

SERVO

Parameters of the FUNCTION:

Name

ADDR

Type

AR_W

EN EBOOL

BUTT AR_X

PARA AR_Y

Kind

Comment

Topological address of the destination CCX17 [ta>>

IN/OUT Activation of DOP on CCX17

IN/OUT

5 bit table linked to the command buttons>>

PID_MMI parameters [62 word table]

Comment

Mixed PID regulator

Management of operator dialogue dedicated to CCX17 from PID

Modulated in the pulse width of a numerical size

PID output stage for open/close valve order

ADR#0.0.4

%M1

%M10:5

%MW45:62

Entry field

Call display

PID_MMI ( ADR#0.0.4,%M1,%MW10:5,%MW45:62 )

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

385

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Syntax

Parameters of the PID_MMI function

The PID_MMI function’s call syntax is:

PID_MMI (ADDR, EN, BUTT, PARA)

The table below presents the different parameters of the PID_MMI function.

Parameter

ADDR

Type Kind

IN = Input

OUT = Output

Description

%MWi:6 IN

%Mi IN / OUT

CCX 17’s address

Activation of the regulation operator dialog.

The application puts this bit to 1 and the PID_MMI function puts it back to 0 when you exit the regulation operator dialog (press Ex)

BUTT

PARA

%Mi:5

%MWi:62

IN / OUT

Bits associated to the CCX 17 buttons.

These bits allow you to drive different screens as well as Manual/Auto.

Parameters of the PID_MMI.

The first 4 are the words of the communication report.

Note: The 4 words of the report are the same as in all the asynchronous communication functions (communication OF, integrated OF DOP and OF

PID_MMI). However the OF PID_MMI automatically manages these words and the application never has to modify them. They are provided for information.

For more information, refer to the Dialog operator (See Operator Dialog functions,

p. 271).

Example of the CCX 17:

If the CCX 17 is connected directly to the PLC’s (UNI-TELWAY) AUX socket, it is at the UNI-TELWAY 4-5 slave addresses.

The coding can be done: l via immediate value: PID_MMI(ADR#{0.254}0.0.4,....) or simply:

PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,....), l via a table of 6 words: %MW10:6 := ADR#0.0.4 PID_MMI(%MW10:6,...).

Synchronization of the dialog operator

The CCX 17 can be used to show screens other than the regulation screens. The IN bit is there to activate/deactivate the regulation dialog operator.

Setting IN to 1 activates the regulation operator dialog and is displayed on the PIDs’ selection screen.

386

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Examples

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

The examples offered below are done in Ladder language.

%MI is associated to the IN bit (display switch on the operator). The alarm management application is always activated, just like the regulation operator dialog.

(*Management of display communication on the CCX 17*)

%M1

%L1

(*DOP application for the display of screens relative to PL7 *)

OPERATE

SEND_MSG(ADR#0.0.4,%KW20.6,%MW30:5)

(*DOP application for the display of adjustment screens *)

OPERATE

PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,%M1,%M10:5,%MW45:62)

(*Exchange flag bit calculation in progress *)

%MW45:X0 MSG_in_progress

%MW200:X0 error ala_900

(*Send alarm upon error appearance *) error MSG_in_progress %M1 OPERATE

SEND_ALARM(ADR#0.0.4,%KW140:29,%MW200:4) ala_900

S rz_ala_900

(* Cancellation of the alarm if it is sounded *) ala_900 rz_ala_900 OPERATE

PANEL_CMD(ADR#0.0.4,%KW170:3,%MW200:4) rz_ala_900

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

387

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Management of the command buttons

When the PID_MMI is activated (IN at 1), it assigns the CCX 17 command buttons.

If the application uses these buttons for anything but regulation, they must be reassigned on the falling edge of IN (using the ASSIGN_KEYS function described in the DOP (See

Operator Dialog functions, p. 271)).

On the other hand, if the CCX 17 is only for regulation, it is advised that you carry out a non-conditioned SET of the IN bit in the application.

Selection of the

PIDs managed by the PID_MMI function

Each PID possesses a bit type DEVAL_MMI parameter. If this bit is at 1, the PID is not managed by PID_MMI. It is the only available level of protection. Moreover, if the application has more than 9 PIDs, it is the way to master those that are handled by the PID_MMI.

Alarm management

It is up to the user to program his/her own alarm management. This overlays itself on the management of the regulation screens.

If an alarm (coming from the dialog operator’s application) goes off while one of the

3 regulation screens is displayed, the CCX_17 is then dedicated to managing the alarm messages. When you return to the regulation operator dialog, the screen appears incomplete. Up/Dn or Refresh allows you to refresh this screen.

Several PID_MMI functions

It is possible to connect several CCX 17 terminals to the same PLC, so it can be useful to have several PID_MMI in the same application.

In this case, the different PID_MMI must be executed consecutively (no integrated

PID call) via the same PL7 task.

388

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

Performance of the PID_MMI function according to the PLC and CCX 17’s operating modes

Introduction

Warm start l l l

This paragraph describes the performance of the PID_MMI function according to the different operating modes of the PLC and the CCX 17: warm restart, crossing into Run or Stop, reconnecting to the CCX 17.

This type of restart occurs for a power return, without changing the application context.

If a problem such as a micro-outage on the PLC occurs while sending a message, the command is not repeated. It is therefore necessary to reinitialize the dialog by activating the IN bit via the application program.

STOP/RUN and

RUN/STOP crossing

In STOP, the PID_MMI function is no longer active. Nevertheless, you can still output parameters belonging to the displayed screen.

In STOP/RUN, the function goes back to the state it was in before crossing into

STOP.

Power outage or reconnecting to the CCX 17

With a power return or reconnection to the CCX 17, this reinitializes the communication with the PLC. Periodically, the PID_MMI reassigns the CCX 17’s command buttons. So after 20 seconds or more, pressing one of the first 3 buttons will display one of the regulation screens (preferably the Ref or Dn button on the left of the second row).

Note: Via the application, it is also possible to detect the presence of the CCX 17 by using the language words associated to the communication channels and to manage the dialog reset via the IN bit.

Cold start It is only on a cold start that the regulation screens are reset.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

389

Operator dialogue on CCX 17

390

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Example of application

Introduction

Aim of this chapter

What's in this

Chapter?

This chapter presents an example of application.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

Description of the application example

Configuration of the example

Programming the example

Page

392

394

398

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

391

Example

Description of the application example

Context This is about maintaining the water temperature of an open air swimming pool at a required value. This value itself is determined according to the ambient air temperature.

Air Temp.

Water Temp

Measure

Reheater

Regul

Output

Setpoint calcualation Setpoint

Pump

A discrete regulation is generally used in this type of installation. It is suggested that in this example, you substitute it for a proportional regulation with a modulated output, which should support reduction in the size of the temperature oscillations around the required value.

Temperature required

Output

Discrete regulation Proportional regulation

T_CYCL

Measuring the water temperature as well as the ambient temperature is done using a Pt 100 resistance thermometer.

392

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Example

The setpoint of the water temperature depends on the exterior temperature according to the below law:

Temperature of the water

30°C

24°C

5°C

35°C

Temperature outside l l l l

A HIGH TEMPERATURE alarm will go off if the water temperature exceeds 32°C,

A LOW TEMPERATURE alarm will go off if it falls below 22°C,

A REGULATION ERROR alarm will go off if the SETPOINT/MEASUREMENT gap exceeds 2°C in either direction,

The regulation will become inoperative (output at 0) in case the pump stops.

393

Example

Configuration of the example

Hardware configuration

This application uses: l l l a TSX 37-10 PLC a TSX DMZ 28DTK discrete I/O module.

a TSX AEZ 414 analog input module,

The configuration is thus as follows:

1 5 7 0

TSX

3710

AEZ

414

DMZ

28DTK

Assignment

2 4 6 8

The discrete output %Q2.0 is assigned to the control the reheater.

The discrete output %Q2.1 is assigned to the control the pump.

The discrete outputs %Q2.2, %Q2.3 and %Q2.4 are assigned to alarms.

The bit %M0 is used to select the process controller operating mode AUTO/MANU.

The discrete inputs %I1.1 and %I1.2 are used to modify the setpoint value in AUTO l l mode and the output value in MANU mode according to the following algorithm:

%I1.1 = 1 increase of 0.1 % per cycle,

%I1.2 = 1 decrease of 0.1 % per cycle.

The input %I1.3 supplies information on the state of the pump.

The input %I1.4 is used to control the pump.

The input %I1.6 controls the display on the CCX 17.

%IW3.0 to %IW3.3 are the values of the analog inputs.

394

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Example

Diagram of the process control loop

PID process controller action is in the INVERSE direction (an increase in the process value must correspond to a decrease in the output value).

PID1

PWM

Water temperature

Air temperature

Motor overheating

control

Reheater overheating control

Sonde

Pt100

Sonde

Pt100

Th J

Th K

TSX AEZ 414

%IW3.0

%IW3.1

%IW3.2

%IW3.3

Setpoint calculation

Mes

Set

PID

OUT

AUTO

MANU

To the heating resistance %Q4.0

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

395

Example

Configuration Rack configuration

Slot

Family

Processors

Discrete Inputs

Discrete Outputs

Analog

Product reference

TSX 3710

TSX DMZ 28DTK

TSX AEZ 414

Channel parameters for TSX DMZ 28DTK module

Channel Type of channel Address

0 Input %I1.0

Input

%I1.1

%I1.2

Input

7 to 16 Inputs not used

%I1.3

%I1.4

%I1.5

%I1.6

Symbol

CONSIG_INCREM

CONSIG_DECREM

ETAT_POMPE

ACT_POMPE

VALID_DOP_REG

Task

MAST

Output

%Q2.0

%Q2.1

%Q2.2

COMM_RECHAUF

COMM_POMPE

ALARM_TEMP_HAU

MAST

ALARM_TEMP_BAS MAST

ALARM_DEF_REG MAST

Output

5 to 12 Outputs not used

%Q2.3

%Q2.4

Channel parameters for TSX AEZ 414 module

Range Scale Min.

Chann el

Address Symbol

%IW3.0

%IW3.1

%IW3.2

%IW3.3

TEMP_EAU

TEMP_AIR

SURCHAUF

_MOTEUR

SURCHAUF

_RECHAUF

Pt100

Thermo J

%..

Thermo K %..

-200

Max.

Unit

500

800

°C

1000 °C

Filtering Task

MAST

396

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Bit

Internal (%M): 256

System (%S): 128

Configuration of bits, words and function blocks

Words

Internal (%MB,%MW,%MD,%MF): 512

System (%SW,%SD): 128

Common (%NW): 0

Constant (%KB,%KW,%KD,%KF): 128

Function blocks

Series 7 timer(s) (%T): 0

Timer(s) (%TM): 64

Monostable(s) (%MN): 4

Counter(s) (%C): 32

Drum(s) (%DR): 2

Example

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

397

Example

Programming the example

Proposed processing method

The block PID1 is assigned to temperature process control. The temperature setpoint is calculated on the basis of the ambient temperature.

On reconnection to the mains, the process control operating mode is selected and the pump is started.

The state of the controller is conditioned by the operating state of the pump. If the pump is faulty the PID switches to MANU and the output is forced to 0.

The status word bits (process value high threshold, process value low threshold, deviation high threshold and deviation low threshold) are used to generate alarms.

The PID loop coefficients will be initialized to: l l l

KP = 600

TI = 300

TD = 50

The display on the CCX is as follows: l l

KP = 6

TI = 30 l TD = 5

These values can of course be fine-tuned during a subsequent adjustment phase.

398

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

MAST-MAIN

Example

(*Initialization of constants on cold restart-> PID loop buffer and initialization of PWM period to 10 s*)

%LO

%SW10:XO OPERATE

%MW10:10:=%KW10:10

OPERATE

%MW55:=1000

(*Pump activation *)

%L1O

%I1.4

%Q2.1

(* PID loop controller operating mode management. This program allows the CCX17 to modify the A/M bit *)

%L11

%I1.3

OPERATE

%MW11:=0

(* Initialization of water temperature setpoint to 27 °C *)

OPERATE

%MW10:=5400

%M10

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

399

Example

(* Execution of the temperature process control loop *)

%L12

OPERATE

(1)

OPERATE

PWM(%MW53,%Q2.0,%MW55:5)

(* Management of process value alarms *)

%L15

COMPARE

%IW3.0>6400

COMPARE

%IW3.0<4400

(* Management of deviation alarms *)

%L16

OPERATE

(%MW60:=%IW3.0-%MW10)

COMPARE

%MW60>400

COMPARE

%MW60<-400

%Q2.2

%Q2.3

%Q2.4

400

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

(* PID loop controller on CCX17 *)

%L20

OPERATE

PID_MMI(ADR#0.0.4,%I1.6,%MO:5,%MW100/62)

%I1.6

Example

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

401

Example

402

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

At a Glance

Overview

What's in this

Chapter?

This Chapter reviews several aspects of the process control application.

This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic

PID parameter adjustment method

Role and influence of PID parameters

Page

404

407

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

403

Appendices

PID parameter adjustment method

Introduction

Closed loop adjustment

Numerous methods to adjust the PID parameters exist, we suggest Ziegler and

Nichols which have two variants: l l closed loop adjustment, open loop adjustment.

Before implementing one of these methods, you must set the PID action direction: l if an increase in the OUT output causes an increase in the PV measurement, make the PID inverted (KP > 0), l on the other hand, if this causes a PV reduction, make the PID direct (KP < 0).

This principal consists of using a proportional command (Ti = 0, Td = 0 ) to start the process by increasing production until it starts to oscillate again after having applied a level to the PID corrector setpoint. All that is required is to raise the critical production level (Kpc) which has caused the non damped oscillation and the oscillation period (Tc) to reduce the values giving an optimal regulation of the regulator.

Measure

404

Tc time

According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is executed with the following values:

PID

Kpc/1,7

Tc/2

Kpc/2,22 0,83 x Tc -

Tc/8 where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.

Note: This adjustment method provides a very dynamic command which can express itself through unwanted overshootsduring the change of setpoint pulses.

In this case, lower the production value until you get the required behaviour.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Open loop adjustment

Appendices

As the regulator is in manual mode, you apply a level to the output and make the procedure response start the same as an integrator with pure delay time. .

Output

Measure

Integrator Process response t

M = S

Tu Tg t

The intersection point on the right hand side which is representative of the integrator with the time axes, determines the time Tu. Next, Tg time is defined as the time necessary for the controlled variable (measurement) to have the same variation size

(% of the scale) as the regulator output.

According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is executed with the following values:

PID

-1,2 Tg/Tu

-0,9 Tg/Tu

2 x Tu

3,3 x Tu

0,5 x Tu

where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.

Note: Attention to the units. If the adjustment is carried out in PL7, multiply the value obtained for KP by 100.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

405

Appendices

This adjustment method also provides a very dynamic command, which can express itself through unwanted overshoots during the change of setpoints’ pulses. In this case, lower the production value until you get the required behavior. The method is interesting because it does not require any assumptions about the nature and the order of the procedure. You can apply it just as well to the stable procedures as to real integrating procedures. It is really interesting in the case of slow procedures

(glass industry,…) because the user only requires the beginning of the response to regulate the coefficients Kp, Ti and Td.

406

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Role and influence of PID parameters

Influence of proportional action

Proportional action is used to influence the process response speed. The higher the gain, the faster the response, and the lower the static error (in direct proportion), though the more stability deteriorates. A suitable compromise between speed and stability must be found. The influence of integral action on process response to a scale division is as follows:

Kp too high

Kp correct

°C

Static error

Kp too low

Influence of integral action t

Integral action is used to cancel out static error (deviation between the process value and the setpoint). The higher the level of integral action (low Ti), the faster the response and the more stability deteriorates. It is also necessary to find a suitable compromise between speed and stability. The influence of integral action on process response to a scale division is as follows:

Ti too high

Ti correct

Ti too low

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

407

Appendices

Note: A low Ti means a high level of integral action.

where Kp = proportional gain, Ti = integration time and Td = derivative time.

Influence of derivative action

Derivative action is anticipatory. In practice, it adds a term which takes account of the speed of variation in the deviation, which makes it possible to anticipate changes by accelerating process response times when the deviation increases and by slowing them down when the deviation decreases. The higher the level of derivative action (high Td), the faster the response. A suitable compromise between speed and stability must be found. The influence of derivative action on process response to a scale division is as follows:

Td too high

Td too low

Td correct t

408

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Appendices

Limits of the PID control loop

If the process is assimilated to a pure delay first order with a transfer function:

( )

= K

(

( ) p

θ p

)

) where:

=model delay,

θ = model time constant,

100%

Measure = M

+ ∆ M

∆ M

Measure = M

τ θ t

The process control performance depends on the ratio

The suitable PID process control is attained in the following domain: 2- -20

θ delay (high t) the PID process control is no longer suitable. In such cases more complex algorithms should be used.

For >20, a process control using a threshold plus hysterisis is sufficient.

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

409

Appendices

410

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

Glossary

A

AS-interface Actuator Sensor interface

C

CCX17

Channel group

CPU

Family of Schneider Automation Human-Machine Interface terminal

Channels of the same type with common parameters. This notion concerns certain application-specific modules such as discrete modules.

Central Processing Unit: generic name used for Schneider Automation processors

D

Discrete Discrete I/Os

TLX DS 37 PL7 xxE

411

Glossary

F

FIPIO

I

IP67

Field bus used to connect sensor or actuator type devices.

Family of Schneider Automation hardware products consisting of sealed I/O modules which connect to the FIPIO field bus, used to produce automated systems with distributed I/Os.